WO2014059663A1 - Switching method and device - Google Patents

Switching method and device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2014059663A1
WO2014059663A1 PCT/CN2012/083208 CN2012083208W WO2014059663A1 WO 2014059663 A1 WO2014059663 A1 WO 2014059663A1 CN 2012083208 W CN2012083208 W CN 2012083208W WO 2014059663 A1 WO2014059663 A1 WO 2014059663A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
base station
downlink
uplink
user equipment
transmission
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2012/083208
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
曾清海
郭轶
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to CN201280036231.7A priority Critical patent/CN104255056B/en
Priority to PCT/CN2012/083208 priority patent/WO2014059663A1/en
Publication of WO2014059663A1 publication Critical patent/WO2014059663A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • H04W36/0069Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link in case of dual connectivity, e.g. decoupled uplink/downlink
    • H04W36/00695Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link in case of dual connectivity, e.g. decoupled uplink/downlink using split of the control plane or user plane
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/0005Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
    • H04W36/0055Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
    • H04W36/0069Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link in case of dual connectivity, e.g. decoupled uplink/downlink

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a handover method and device.
  • Heterogeneous Network Heterogeneous Network
  • LPNs low power nodes
  • a user equipment (UE) of a macro cell is switched to a micro cell by setting a cell range extension (CRE) for a pico cell, in a CRE range.
  • CRE cell range extension
  • the UE accesses the micro cell, and the micro cell serves as a serving cell, and both the downlink and the uplink are served by the micro cell.
  • the macro cell transmits the control signaling and the user data without transmitting or low power in the set almost blank subframes (ABS), thereby reducing the cell throughput. And spectral efficiency.
  • ABS almost blank subframes
  • a first aspect of the present invention provides a handover method, including:
  • the source base station determines to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell or to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell;
  • the source base station sends a handover request to the target base station corresponding to the first cell, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
  • the source base station sends a handover command to the user equipment, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so that After the handover, the user equipment maintains the uplink transmission with the source base station, and the user equipment performs the downlink transmission via the target base station, or the user equipment maintains the foregoing relationship with the source base station after handover Downlink transmission and via the target base station Performing the uplink transmission;
  • the downlink transmission information and the downlink resource configuration information include a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink transmission information and the uplink resource configuration information include an indication for performing uplink transmission handover. Switch type indication.
  • the determining, by the source base station, the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell specifically: when the source base station is a micro base station, When the target base station is a macro base station, the micro base station determines to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell served by the macro base station; or the source base station determines that the user equipment is to be used.
  • the uplink transmission is switched to the first cell, and the method includes: when the source base station is a macro base station, and the target base station is a micro base station, the macro base station determines to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment to be used by the micro base station The first cell providing the service.
  • the first cell and the service that provides a service to the user equipment before the handover The coverage of the cell corresponding to the source base station overlaps; or, the frequency of the target base station overlaps with the frequency of the source base station.
  • the source base station Before the target base station sends the handover request message, the method further includes: the source base station sending a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station, where the allocation request message is used by the target base station in the first cell as the user The device allocates a downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or an uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
  • the method further includes: the source base station sending, to the user equipment, a medium access control layer control unit MAC CE, where the MAC CE is used to indicate whether to allow uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation.
  • the source base station sending, to the user equipment, a medium access control layer control unit MAC CE, where the MAC CE is used to indicate whether to allow uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation.
  • the downlink transmission information further includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identifier, and the E-RAB corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier a service quality parameter, a radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI information of the user equipment;
  • the information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, an E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; where the radio resource control context information includes : uplink radio resource specific configuration information and/or C-RNTI information of the user equipment.
  • the downlink resource configuration information that is allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: signaling radio bearer SRB downlink configuration information, data radio bearer DRB downlink configuration information, and media access control MAC downlink configuration information.
  • the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH configuration information; the uplink resource configuration information allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink configuration information, DRB uplink configuration information, MAC uplink configuration information, and PUSCH configuration information.
  • the handover command further includes an indication identifier, where the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched and retain the source.
  • An uplink between the base stations; or, the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched and reserve with the source base station
  • the downlink identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched or newly establish an uplink transmission for carrying the to-be-switched Uplink and reserve uplink and downlink with the source base station.
  • a second aspect of the present invention provides a handover method, including:
  • the target base station receives a handover request sent by the source base station, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
  • the target base station Sending, by the target base station, the downlink transmission to be switched allocated to the user equipment to the source base station Transmitting the corresponding downlink resource configuration information or the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so that the user equipment maintains the uplink transmission with the source base station and performs the downlink transmission via the target base station after the handover, Or the user equipment maintains the downlink transmission with the source base station after the handover and performs the uplink transmission via the target base station;
  • the downlink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the determining, by the target base station, that the downlink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the first cell provided by the target base station includes: The source base station is a micro base station, and when the target base station is a macro base station, the target base station determines that the downlink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the first cell provided by the target base station; or the target base station determines to allow the The uplink transmission of the user equipment is switched to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the method includes: when the source base station is a macro base station, and the target base station is a micro base station, the target base station determines to allow uplink of the user equipment. The transmission is switched to the first cell provided by the target base station.
  • the method before the target base station receives the handover request sent by the source base station, the method further includes: Receiving, by the target base station, a radio resource allocation request message sent by the source base station, where the radio resource allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate downlink resources corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched for the user equipment in the first cell. Or the uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
  • the downlink transmission information is further The following one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identifier, E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; wherein, the wireless The resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI information of the user equipment; the uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB The identifier, the E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and the radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control context information includes: uplink radio resource dedicated configuration information and/or The C-RNTI information of the user equipment.
  • a third aspect of the present invention provides a handover method, including:
  • the user equipment receives the handover command sent by the source base station, where the handover command has the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched and the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
  • the user equipment performs the downlink resource configuration according to the downlink resource configuration information, and after the handover, the uplink transmission with the source base station is performed, and the downlink transmission is performed by using the target base station; or the uplink resource is performed according to the uplink resource configuration information. Configuring to maintain the downlink transmission with the source base station after handover and perform the uplink transmission via the target base station;
  • the downlink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the switching command that is received by the user equipment further includes an indication identifier, where the indication identifier is used to indicate the user equipment and the target The base station newly establishes a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched and reserves an uplink with the source base station; or, the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station are newly created.
  • the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station are newly used for a bearer Determining a downlink of the downlink transmission of the handover or newly establishing an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be handed over, and retaining an uplink and a downlink with the source base station.
  • the method further includes: the user equipment dividing the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, the uplink PDCP entity corresponding to the second cell provided by the source base station, the downlink PDCP entity corresponding to the first cell provided by the target base station; the user equipment dividing the RLC entity into an uplink An RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, where the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, where the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station; The first cell performs the downlink transmission with the target base station, and performs the uplink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
  • the source base station is a micro base station
  • the target base station is a macro base station.
  • the method further includes: the user equipment dividing the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, the uplink PDCP entity corresponding to the first cell provided by the target base station, the downlink PDCP entity corresponding to the second cell provided by the source base station; the user equipment dividing the RLC entity into an uplink An RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, where the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station;
  • the first cell performs the uplink transmission with the target base station, and performs the downlink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
  • the source base station is a macro base station
  • the target base station is a micro base station
  • a fourth aspect of the present invention provides a base station, including:
  • a determining unit configured to determine to switch downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell or to switch uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell;
  • a sending unit configured to send a handover request to the target base station corresponding to the first cell, where the switching request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
  • the sending unit is further configured to send, to the user equipment, a handover command, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched and the uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched. Configuring information, so that the user equipment maintains the uplink transmission with the base station after handover, and the user equipment performs the downlink transmission via the target base station, or maintains the downlink transmission with the base station after handover And the user equipment performs the uplink transmission via the target base station;
  • the downlink transmission information and the downlink resource configuration information include a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink transmission information and the uplink resource configuration information include an indication for performing uplink transmission handover. Switch type indication.
  • the determining unit is specifically configured to: when the base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station, determine that the user equipment is Downlink transmission is switched to the first cell served by the macro base station; or, when The base station is a macro base station, and when the target base station is a micro base station, it is determined that the uplink transmission of the user equipment is switched to the first cell served by the micro base station.
  • the first cell and the service that provides a service to the user equipment before the handover The coverage of the cell corresponding to the base station overlaps; or, the base station overlaps with the frequency of the target base station.
  • the sending unit is further used And sending a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station, where the allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate, to the user equipment, a downlink resource corresponding to a downlink transmission to be switched or to be switched in the first cell.
  • the uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission is further used.
  • the sending unit is further configured to: send, to the user equipment, a medium access control layer control unit MAC CE, where the MAC CE is used to indicate whether to allow uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation.
  • MAC CE medium access control layer control unit
  • the downlink transmission information further includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identifier, E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource Controlling the context information
  • the radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI information of the user terminal
  • the uplink transmission information includes one or the following Any combination of the at least one E-RAB identifier, the E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and the radio resource control context information
  • the radio resource control context information includes: Information and/or C-RNTI information of the user terminal.
  • the downlink resource configuration information allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: signaling radio bearer SRB downlink configuration information, data radio bearer DRB downlink The configuration information, the medium access control MAC downlink configuration information, and the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH configuration information;
  • the uplink resource configuration information allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink configuration information, DRB uplink configuration Information, MAC uplink configuration information, PUSCH configuration information.
  • the handover command further includes an indication identifier, where the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying downlink transmissions to be handed over and reserve with the base station.
  • the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched and reserve a downlink with the base station
  • the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched or newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched. And retaining the uplink and downlink with the base station.
  • a fifth aspect of the present invention provides a base station, including:
  • a receiving unit configured to receive a handover request message sent by the source base station, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
  • a determining unit configured to determine that the downlink transmission or the uplink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the first cell provided by the base station;
  • a sending unit configured to send, to the source base station, downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so that the user equipment remains after the handover
  • the downlink transmission with the source base station and the user equipment performs the downlink transmission via the base station after handover, or the user equipment maintains the downlink transmission with the source base station after handover Said user equipment performs said uplink transmission via said base station after handover;
  • the downlink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the determining unit is specifically configured to: when the source base station is a micro base station, and the base station is a macro base station, determining to allow the user Downlink transmission of the device is switched to the first cell provided by the base station; or, when the source base station is a macro And determining, by the base station, that the base station is a micro base station, and determining that the uplink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the first cell provided by the base station.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive the radio resource allocation sent by the source base station a request message, the radio resource allocation request message is used by the base station in the first cell to allocate, to the user equipment, a downlink resource corresponding to a downlink transmission to be switched or an uplink resource corresponding to an uplink transmission to be switched.
  • the downlink transmission information is further The following one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identifier, E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; wherein, the wireless The resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI information of the user equipment; the uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB The identifier, the E-RAB service quality parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and the radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control context information includes: uplink radio resource specific configuration information and/or the user equipment C-RNTI information.
  • a sixth aspect of the present invention provides a user equipment, including:
  • a receiving unit configured to receive a handover command sent by the source base station, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched;
  • a configuration unit configured to perform downlink resource configuration according to the downlink resource configuration information, maintain the uplink transmission with the source base station after the handover, and perform the downlink transmission by using the target base station after the handover; or configure according to the uplink resource
  • the information is configured to perform uplink resource allocation, and after the handover, the downlink transmission with the source base station is maintained, and the user equipment performs the uplink transmission by using the target base station after handover;
  • the downlink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the switching command The indication identifier is further used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched and reserve an uplink with the source base station.
  • the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched and reserve a downlink with the source base station; or
  • the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched or newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched, and keep An uplink and a downlink between the source base station and the source base station.
  • the second possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect further includes: a dividing unit, configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity And a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station; and the RLC entity is divided into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, the uplink RLC entity corresponding to the second cell provided by the source base station, the downlink RLC entity corresponding to the first cell provided by the target base station, where the user equipment is connected to the first cell Performing the downlink transmission with the target base station, and performing the uplink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
  • a dividing unit configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity And a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided
  • the source base station is a micro base station
  • the target base station is a macro base station.
  • the fourth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect further includes: a dividing unit, configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity And a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the RLC entity is divided into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, the uplink RLC entity corresponding to the first cell provided by the target base station, the downlink RLC entity corresponding to the second cell provided by the source base station, where the user equipment is connected to the first cell Performing the uplink transmission with the target base station, and performing the downlink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
  • a dividing unit configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity And a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided
  • the source base station is a macro base station
  • the target base station is a micro base station
  • a seventh aspect of the present invention provides a base station, including:
  • a processor configured to determine to switch downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell or to switch uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell;
  • a transmitter configured to send a handover request to a target base station corresponding to the first cell, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
  • the transmitter is further configured to send, to the user equipment, a handover command, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the user equipment, or an uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
  • Configuring information such that the user equipment maintains the uplink transmission with the base station after handover, and the user equipment performs the downlink transmission via the target base station after handover, or maintains a location with the base station after handover Determining downlink transmission, and the user equipment performs the uplink transmission via the target base station after handover;
  • the downlink transmission information and the downlink resource configuration information include a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink transmission information and the uplink resource configuration information include an indication for performing uplink transmission handover. Switch type indication.
  • the processor is specifically configured to: when the base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station, determine that the user equipment is The downlink transmission is switched to the first cell served by the macro base station; or, when the base station is a macro base station, and the target base station is a micro base station, determining to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment to The micro base station provides the first cell of the service.
  • the first possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect And sending a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station, where the allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate, to the user equipment, a downlink resource corresponding to a downlink transmission to be switched or to be switched in the first cell.
  • the uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission is sent to the target base station, where the allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate, to the user equipment, a downlink resource corresponding to a downlink transmission to be switched or to be switched in the first cell.
  • the transmitter is further configured to: send, to the user equipment, a medium access control layer control unit MAC CE, where the MAC CE is used to indicate whether to allow uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation.
  • MAC CE medium access control layer control unit
  • the downlink transmission information further includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved wireless connection The E-RAB service quality parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier and the radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or The cell-radio network temporarily identifies the C-RNTI information of the user terminal; the uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, and the E-RAB corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier The QoS parameter, the radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control context information includes: uplink radio resource specific configuration information and/or C-RNTI information of the user terminal.
  • the downlink resource configuration information that is allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: signaling radio bearer SRB downlink configuration information, data radio bearer DRB downlink configuration information, and media access control MAC downlink configuration information.
  • the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH configuration information; the uplink resource configuration information allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink configuration information, DRB uplink configuration information, MAC uplink configuration information, and PUSCH configuration information.
  • the handover command further includes an indication identifier, where the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying downlink transmissions to be handed over and reserve with the base station.
  • the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched and reserve a downlink with the base station
  • the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched or newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched. And retaining the uplink and downlink with the base station.
  • An eighth aspect of the present invention provides a base station, including:
  • a receiver configured to receive a handover request message sent by the source base station, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
  • a processor configured to determine that the downlink transmission or the uplink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the a first cell provided by the base station;
  • a transmitter configured to send, to the source base station, downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so that the user equipment remains after the handover
  • the downlink transmission with the source base station and the user equipment performs the downlink transmission via the base station after handover, or the user equipment maintains the downlink transmission with the source base station after handover Said user equipment performs said uplink transmission via said base station after handover;
  • the downlink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the processor is specifically configured to: when the source base station is a micro base station, where the base station is a macro base station, determining to allow the user The downlink transmission of the device is switched to the first cell provided by the base station; or when the source base station is a macro base station, and the base station is a micro base station, determining that the uplink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the base station First cell.
  • the receiving, by the source base station, a radio resource allocation request message, the radio resource allocation The request message is used by the base station in the first cell to allocate the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or the uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
  • the downlink transmission information is further The following one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identifier, E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; wherein, the wireless The resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI information of the user equipment; the uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB The identifier, the E-RAB service quality parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and the radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control context information includes: uplink radio resource specific configuration information and/or the user equipment C-RNTI information.
  • a ninth aspect of the present invention provides a user equipment, including:
  • a receiver configured to receive a handover command sent by the source base station, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched;
  • the processor is configured to perform downlink resource configuration according to the downlink resource configuration information, and maintain the uplink transmission with the source base station after the handover, and perform the downlink transmission by using the target base station after the handover; or configure according to the uplink resource
  • the information is configured to perform uplink resource allocation, and after the handover, the downlink transmission with the source base station is maintained, and the user equipment performs the uplink transmission by using the target base station after handover;
  • the downlink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the handover command further includes an indication identifier, where the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station are newly used for a bearer Determining a downlink of the downlink transmission of the handover and retaining an uplink with the source base station; or, the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station are newly used to carry the to-be-switched Uplink of the uplink transmission and retaining a downlink with the source base station; or, the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly create a downlink transmission for carrying the to-be-switched The downlink or new uplink used to carry the uplink transmission to be handed over, and the uplink and downlink with the source base station are reserved.
  • the processor is further configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity And a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station; and the RLC entity is divided into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, the uplink RLC entity corresponding to the second cell provided by the source base station, the downlink RLC entity corresponding to the first cell provided by the target base station, where the user equipment is connected to the first cell Performing the downlink transmission with the target base station, and performing the uplink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
  • the source base station is a micro base station
  • the target base station is a macro base station.
  • the processor is further configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity And a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station; and the RLC entity is divided into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, the uplink RLC entity corresponding to the first cell provided by the target base station, the downlink RLC entity corresponding to the second cell provided by the source base station, where the user equipment is connected to the first cell Performing the uplink transmission with the target base station, and performing the downlink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
  • the source base station is a macro base station
  • the target base station is a micro base station
  • the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station, so that one of the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the user equipment is served by the source base station, and the other is the target base station.
  • Cell services are provided to increase cell throughput and spectrum efficiency.
  • FIG. 1 is a flowchart of an embodiment of a handover method provided by the present invention
  • FIG. 2 is a flowchart of still another embodiment of a handover method provided by the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of another embodiment of a handover method provided by the present invention.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of another embodiment of a handover method provided by the present invention.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a PDCP entity and an RLC AM entity provided by an example of the present invention
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a communication scenario between a user equipment, a source base station, and a target base station in the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another communication scenario between a user equipment and a source base station and a target base station in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4;
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a heterogeneous network scenario applied to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of another embodiment of a handover method provided by the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a communication scenario between a user equipment, a source base station, and a target base station in the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of another communication scenario between a user equipment and a source base station and a target base station in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9;
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of a handover method provided by the present invention.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another network architecture of the handover method provided by the present invention.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a base station according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a base station according to the present invention.
  • 16 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a user equipment provided by the present invention.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a base station according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a base station according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a user equipment according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a communication system provided by the present invention.
  • the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention are clearly and completely described in the following with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present invention. It is obvious that the described embodiments are only a part of the embodiments of the present invention, and not all of the embodiments. example. All other embodiments obtained by those skilled in the art based on the embodiments of the present invention without creative efforts are within the scope of the present invention.
  • GSM Global System for Mobile Communications
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • Code Division Multiple Code Division Multiple
  • TDMA Time Division Multiple Access
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • FDMA Frequency Division Multiple Access
  • OFDM Frequency Division Multiple Addressing
  • OFDMA Orthogonal Frequency OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiple Access) system
  • SC-FDMA single carrier FDMA
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • the user equipment involved in the present application may be a wireless terminal or a wired terminal, and the wireless terminal may be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to the user, a handheld device with wireless connectivity, or a wireless modem. Other processing equipment.
  • the wireless terminal can communicate with one or more core networks via a radio access network (eg, RAN, Radio Access Network), which can be a mobile terminal, such as a mobile phone (or "cellular" phone) and with a mobile terminal
  • RAN Radio Access Network
  • the computers for example, can be portable, pocket-sized, handheld, computer-integrated or in-vehicle mobile devices that exchange language and/or data with the wireless access network.
  • a wireless terminal may also be called a system, a Subscriber Unit, a Subscriber Station, a Mobile Station, a Mobile, a Remote Station, an Access Point, Remote Terminal, Access Terminal, User Terminal, User Agent, User Device, or User Equipment s
  • a base station (e.g., an access point) referred to in this application may refer to a device in an access network that communicates with a wireless terminal over one or more sectors over an air interface.
  • the base station can be used to convert the received air frame to the IP packet as a router between the wireless terminal and the rest of the access network, wherein the remainder of the access network can include an Internet Protocol (IP) network.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • the base station can also coordinate attribute management of the air interface.
  • the base station may be a base station (BTS, Base Transceiver Station) in GSM or CDMA, or may be a base station (NodeB) in WCDMA, or may be an evolved base station in LTE (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B), this application is not limited.
  • BTS Base Transceiver Station
  • NodeB base station
  • NodeB evolved base station in LTE
  • LTE NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B
  • system and “network” are used interchangeably herein.
  • the term “and/or” in this context is merely an association that describes the associated object, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and / or B, which can mean: A exists separately, and both A and B exist, exist alone B these three situations.
  • the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the contextual object is an "or" relationship.
  • the handover operation involved is essentially an operation of separating the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the user equipment. Therefore, correspondingly, the handover request, handover response, Messages such as handover commands may be messages for requesting, responding, and commanding to perform uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation operations, respectively.
  • FIG. 1 is a flowchart of an embodiment of a handover method provided by the present invention, which may be performed by a source base station, as shown in FIG. 1, the method includes:
  • the source base station determines to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell or switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell.
  • the source base station sends a handover request to the target base station corresponding to the first cell, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment.
  • the source base station sends a handover command to the user equipment, where the handover command has the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so that the user equipment remains after the handover.
  • the uplink transmission of the source base station is performed by the target base station, or after the handover, the user equipment maintains downlink transmission with the source base station and performs uplink transmission via the target base station.
  • the downlink transmission information and the downlink resource configuration information include a handover type indication for indicating downlink transmission switching, or the uplink transmission information and the uplink resource configuration information include a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station, so that the user equipment serves the cell service provided by the source base station in the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission after the handover, and the other target
  • the cell service provided by the base station implements uplink and downlink transmission separation of the user equipment, reduces interference caused by the base station to the user equipment, and improves cell throughput and spectrum efficiency.
  • the first cell provided by the target base station overlaps with the coverage of the cell corresponding to the source base station that provides service to the user equipment before the handover; or, the frequency of the target base station overlaps with the source base station.
  • the coverage or frequency overlaps and when the user equipment communicates with one base station separately, it will be interfered by another base station.
  • the uplink and downlink transmissions are separated, that is, the user equipment and the one base station maintain the uplink transmission, and the other base station maintains the downlink transmission, which can effectively reduce the interference of the base station to the transmission under the premise of ensuring the user experience.
  • the source base station may be a micro base station, and the micro base station may be a low power node (LPN), or a small base station, or a remote radio head (RRH).
  • the current serving cell of the user equipment is a pico cell provided by the micro base station,
  • the user equipment performs uplink communication and downlink communication with the micro cell.
  • the source base station may determine to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment from the micro cell to the macro cell provided by the macro base station, that is, the target base station to be switched may be a macro base station, and the target cell to be switched is a macro base station.
  • the first cell is provided, and the user equipment maintains uplink transmission with the micro cell.
  • the first cell provided by the macro base station may cover a cell corresponding to the source base station that provides the service to the user equipment before the handover, or the macro base station and the micro base station
  • the frequencies provided can be overlapped.
  • the source base station may also be a macro base station, where the current service cell of the user equipment is a macro cell provided by the macro base station, and the user equipment performs uplink communication and downlink communication with the macro cell.
  • the source base station may determine to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment from the macro cell to the pico cell provided by the micro base station, that is, the target base station to be switched may be a micro base station, and the handover may be performed.
  • the target cell is the first cell provided by the micro base station, and the user equipment maintains the downlink transmission with the macro cell.
  • the cell corresponding to the source base station that provides the service to the user equipment before the handover may cover the first cell provided by the micro base station, or the macro base station and the micro base station provide The frequencies can overlap.
  • the source base station may send a handover request to the target base station, where the handover request has downlink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment, so that the user equipment maintains the uplink transmission with the source base station and performs downlink transmission through the target base station after the handover;
  • the handover request has uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment, so that after the handover, the user equipment maintains downlink transmission with the source base station and performs uplink transmission via the target base station.
  • the micro base station may send downlink data to the user equipment at a lower power (for example, the source base station or the target base station), and the user equipment may transmit the macro data to the macro base station (for example, may be the target base station or source).
  • the base station transmits uplink data.
  • the interference of the base station to the user equipment can be reduced, thereby improving cell throughput and spectrum efficiency. It can be understood by those skilled in the art that the implementation scenario can be applied to a scene in which the user equipment is closer to the center of the micro base station than the center of the macro base station, and can be applied to other scenarios, and details are not described herein again.
  • the downlink resource configuration information and the downlink transmission information included in the handover request include a handover type indication for indicating downlink transmission handover.
  • the downlink transmission information may further include one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer (Evolved) The radio access bearer (E-RAB) identifier, the E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and the radio resource control (RRC) context information, where the RRC context information may include the downlink radio resource.
  • the uplink transmission information and the uplink resource configuration information included in the handover request include a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the uplink transmission information may further include one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, at least one E-RAB identifier corresponding to the E-RAB quality of service parameter, and radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control The context may include: uplink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell radio network Temporary Identifier (C-RNTI) information of the user equipment.
  • C-RNTI cell radio network Temporary Identifier
  • radio resource configuration information may also be included in the handover request, which is not listed here.
  • the target base station may allocate, to the user equipment, downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
  • the target base station may carry the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, which is allocated by the target base station to the user equipment, in the handover response sent to the source base station.
  • the source base station may send a handover command to the user equipment, where the handover command may have downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
  • the source base station may send a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station in advance, where the allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched to the user equipment in the first cell or The uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched. That is, the source base station may request in advance, in the first cell of the target base station, the user equipment to allocate the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or the uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, without performing the handover procedure.
  • the source base station may send a handover request to the target base station and send a handover command to the user equipment, where the handover request may indicate the target base station to use.
  • the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission or the uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission may be the same as the handover command, and is also used to indicate whether the uplink is allowed.
  • the transmission and downlink transmission are separated.
  • the source base station may further send a medium access control layer unit MAC CE to the user equipment, to indicate whether to allow uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation.
  • MAC CE medium access control layer unit
  • the source base station may notify the user equipment to perform uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation by using a handover command; After the target base station allocates uplink resources or downlink resources to the user equipment in advance, the source base station may notify the user equipment to perform uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation by using the MAC CE, and the implementation manner and the handover request and handover are performed.
  • the comparison of the command methods can reduce the switching delay.
  • the downlink resource configuration information allocated by the target base station to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: signaling radio bearer SRB downlink configuration information, data radio bearer DRB downlink configuration information, media access control MAC downlink configuration information, Physical downlink shared channel PDSCH configuration information.
  • the SRB downlink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: SRB identifier, radio link control (RLC) downlink configuration, logical channel identifier, and the like; DRB downlink configuration information includes an evolved packet system identifier (eps- Bearer Identity), DRB identifier, packet data '; packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) downlink configuration, radio link control (RLC) downlink configuration, logical channel identification.
  • RLC radio link control
  • the downlink data configuration protocol downlink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: a drop timer configuration, a header compression protocol configuration, and whether the RLC acknowledged mode (RLC AM) needs to be sent during handover.
  • PDCP status report information such as the length of the PDCP sequence number when the radio link control is not confirmed mode (RLC unacknowledged mode, RLC UM).
  • the radio link control downlink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: downlink RLC-AM configuration, downlink RLC-UM configuration, and the like.
  • the downlink RLC-AM configuration includes one or any combination of the following: reordering timer configuration, RLC status reporting, prohibiting timer configuration, and the like.
  • the downlink RLC-UM configuration includes one or any combination of the following: serial number length configuration, reorder timer configuration, and so on.
  • the MAC downlink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: discontinuous reception (DRX) configuration, secondary cell deactivation timer configuration, and the like.
  • the PDSCH configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: a reference signal power configuration, a reference signal per resource element power, and a PDSCH resource element power ratio configuration.
  • the uplink resource configuration information allocated by the target base station to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink configuration information, DRB uplink configuration information, MAC uplink configuration information, and PUSCH configuration information.
  • the SRB uplink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: SRB identifier, radio link control uplink configuration, logical channel identifier, logical channel uplink configuration, and the like;
  • the DRB uplink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: System bearer identifier (eps-bearer Identity), DRB identifier, packet data convergence protocol configuration uplink configuration, radio link control uplink configuration, logical channel identifier, logical channel uplink configuration and other information.
  • the packet data convergence protocol uplink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: a drop timer configuration, a header compression protocol configuration, whether a radio link control acknowledgement mode (RLC AM) needs to send a PDCP status report during handover, Information such as the length of the PDCP sequence number when the radio link controls the non-acknowledgement mode (RLC UM).
  • RLC AM radio link control acknowledgement mode
  • RLC UM the non-acknowledgement mode
  • the radio link control uplink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following:
  • the uplink RLC-AM configuration includes one or any combination of the following: polling (re) retransmission timer configuration, polling PDU number configuration, polling byte number configuration, and RLC PDU maximum retransmission times configuration.
  • the downlink RLC-UM configuration includes information such as the serial number length configuration.
  • the logical channel uplink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: logical channel priority configuration, logical channel priority bit rate configuration, logical channel group, token bucket algorithm parameter configuration, and the like.
  • the MAC uplink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: DRX configuration, uplink shared transport channel configuration, power headroom configuration, and secondary cell deactivation timer configuration.
  • the PUSCH configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: frequency hopping parameter configuration, whether high-order modulation configuration, uplink reference signal configuration, and the like are allowed.
  • the source base station sends a handover command to the user equipment, where the target base station allocates downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched to the user equipment or the uplink transmission corresponding to the handover Upstream resource configuration information.
  • the downlink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the handover command sent by the source base station to the user equipment may further include an indication identifier, where the indication identifier may be used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched and retain the source base station.
  • the user equipment and the source base station communicate normally through the reserved uplink or downlink.
  • the user equipment and the target base station communicate normally through the switched downlink or uplink.
  • the foregoing indication identifier may be used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying downlink transmissions to be switched and delete a downlink between the source base station, or used to carry uplink transmissions to be switched. Uplink and remove the uplink from the source base station. In the implementation scenario of deleting the downlink or uplink between the user equipment and the source base station, the uplink or downlink reserved by the source base station can continue to communicate.
  • the foregoing indication identifier may be used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink or an uplink for carrying downlink transmissions to be switched, and reserve downlink and uplink with the source base station.
  • the uplink and downlink communications between the user equipment and the source base station may continue during the handover process, and the service delay in the handover process is reduced. Or business interruption time.
  • the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station, so that the user equipment provides a cell service provided by the source base station in the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission after the handover, and A cell service provided by the target base station.
  • the user equipment may send uplink data to the micro base station at a lower power
  • the macro base station may send downlink data to the user equipment with a stronger transmission power.
  • the micro base station when the user equipment is closer to the center of the micro base station, the micro base station sends downlink data to the user equipment with lower power, and the user equipment sends the uplink data to the macro base station with higher power.
  • the interference of the base station to the user equipment can be reduced, thereby improving the cell throughput and the spectrum efficiency.
  • This embodiment provides a method for switching uplink or downlink transmission of a user equipment to a target base station, so that uplink and downlink of the user equipment communicate with different base stations, and the method is also applicable to existing carrier types and new Carrier Type (NCT), new carrier class
  • NCT new Carrier Type
  • the type may or may not transmit a primary synchronization signal/secondary synchronization signal, etc., and may transmit an enhanced physical downlink control channel (E-PDCCH) on the NCT or perform cross-scheduling by other carriers through the PDCCH or the E-PDCCH.
  • E-PDCCH enhanced physical downlink control channel
  • 2 is a flowchart of still another embodiment of a handover method according to the present invention. The difference in the previous embodiment is that the method can be performed by a target base station. As shown in FIG. 2, the method includes:
  • the target base station receives a handover request sent by the source base station, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment.
  • the target base station determines to allow the downlink transmission or the uplink transmission of the user equipment to be handed over to the first cell provided by the target base station.
  • the target base station sends, to the source base station, the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched and the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so that the user equipment maintains the uplink transmission with the source base station after the handover.
  • Downlink transmission is performed via the target base station, or the user equipment maintains downlink transmission with the source base station and performs uplink transmission via the target base station after handover.
  • the downlink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the source base station may be a base station
  • the target base station may be a macro base station.
  • the handover request received by the target base station may have downlink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment, so that downlink transmission of the user equipment is switched by the micro base station.
  • the downlink transmission information may include one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, at least one E-RAB identifier corresponding to the E-RAB quality of service parameter, and radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control context
  • the information may include: downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identity C-RNTI information of the user equipment.
  • the source base station may be a macro base station
  • the target base station may be a base station.
  • the handover request received by the target base station may have uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment, so that the uplink transmission of the user equipment is switched by the macro base station.
  • the uplink transmission information may include one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, at least one E-RAB identifier corresponding to the E-RAB quality of service parameter, and radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control context information Can include: Upstream radio resource specific configuration The cell-radio network temporary identification C-RNTI information of the information and/or user equipment.
  • the target base station may perform admission control to determine whether to allow downlink transmission or uplink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the first cell provided by the target base station. If the target base station allows the downlink transmission or the uplink transmission of the user equipment to be handed over to the first cell provided by the target base station, the target base station may send a handover response to the source base station.
  • the target base station determines that the downlink transmission or the uplink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the first cell provided by the target base station
  • the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched may be allocated to the user equipment or is to be switched.
  • the target base station may carry the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched and the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched that the target base station allocates to the user equipment.
  • the source base station may send a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station in advance, where the target base station may allocate, in the first cell, the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched in the first cell. Configuration information or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
  • the target base station receives the handover request sent by the source base station to indicate whether to allow uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation.
  • the downlink resource configuration information allocated by the target base station to the user equipment may include one or any combination of the following: SRB downlink configuration information, DRB downlink configuration information, MAC downlink configuration information, and PDSCH configuration information.
  • the uplink resource configuration information allocated by the target base station to the user equipment may include one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink configuration information, DRB uplink configuration information, MAC uplink configuration information, and PUSCH configuration information.
  • the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station, and the target base station may allow the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the target base station, thereby enabling the uplink transmission of the user equipment.
  • One of the downlink transmissions is provided by the cell service provided by the source base station, and the other is provided by the target base station, thereby improving cell throughput and spectrum efficiency.
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of another embodiment of a handover method according to the present invention. The method is different from the foregoing method embodiments. The method may be performed by a user equipment. As shown in FIG. 3, the method includes: The user equipment receives the handover command sent by the source base station, where the handover command has the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched and the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
  • the user equipment performs the downlink resource configuration according to the downlink resource configuration information, and maintains the uplink transmission with the source base station after the handover and performs downlink transmission through the target base station; or performs uplink resource configuration according to the uplink resource configuration information, and maintains the source and the base station after the handover. Downlink transmission and uplink transmission via the target base station.
  • the downlink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the source base station may be a micro base station, and the current serving cell of the user equipment is a micro cell provided by the micro base station, and the user equipment performs uplink communication and downlink communication with the micro cell.
  • the source base station may determine to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment from the micro cell to the macro cell provided by the macro base station, that is, the target base station to be handed over may be a macro base station, and the target cell to be switched is the first provided by the macro base station. Community.
  • the source base station may also be a macro base station, where the current service cell of the user equipment is a macro cell provided by the macro base station, and the user equipment performs uplink communication and downlink communication with the macro cell.
  • the source base station may determine to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment from the macro cell to the micro cell provided by the micro base station, that is, the target base station to be handed over may be a micro base station, and the target cell to be switched is the first provided by the micro base station. Community.
  • the user equipment may receive a handover command sent by the source base station, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated for the user equipment, to indicate that the user equipment switches the downlink transmission to Target cell.
  • the user equipment may perform downlink resource configuration according to the downlink resource configuration information. Specifically, the user equipment may reset the downlink of the media access control MAC, reestablish the downlink of the packet data convergence protocol PDCP entity, and reconstruct The radio link controls the downlink of the RLC entity, and configures the downlink transmission of the PDCP entity and the downlink transmission of the RLC entity. Alternatively, the user equipment may also reset the downlink of the medium access control MAC, reestablish the downlink of the packet data convergence protocol PDCP entity, reconstruct the downlink of the radio link control RLC entity, and configure the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the PDCP entity. , and uplink transmission and downlink transmission of the RLC entity.
  • the foregoing downlink operations for MAC, RLC, and PDCP can be performed. Separately for the downlink that needs to be handed over to the target base station.
  • the user equipment After the user equipment is configured with the uplink transmission of the PDCP entity and the RLC entity, if the uplink between the source and the base station is to be switched subsequently, the user equipment may directly enable the control by the MAC entity without passing through the RLC entity.
  • the downlink for resetting the MAC may include: stopping a timer configured for all MAC downlinks in operation, and clearing a buffer of all hybrid automatic repeat request (HQQ) processes (process)
  • HQQ hybrid automatic repeat request
  • Each downlink HARQ process considers that the next received TB is the first TB, and if so, the temporary cell-radio network temporary identifier (temporary C-RNTI) is operated.
  • the downlink data transmission and reconstruction process may be performed separately for the DRB mapped to the RLC-AM and the DRB and the SRB mapped to the RLC-UM.
  • the receiving end of the RLC UM entity and the RLC AM entity in the RLC reconstruction may perform corresponding operations.
  • the process of resetting the downlink of the MAC, reestablishing the downlink of the PDCP entity, and reconstructing the downlink of the RLC entity is applicable to the following embodiments.
  • the handover command that is received by the user equipment may further include an indication identifier, where the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying downlink transmissions to be switched, and The uplink with the source base station is reserved. Thereby, the uplink communication between the user equipment and the source base station can be continued during the handover.
  • the indication identifier may be further used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying downlink transmissions to be switched, and reserve downlink and uplink with the source base station. road. Therefore, the downlink communication and the uplink communication between the user equipment and the source base station can be continued during the handover process, which reduces service delay or service interruption.
  • the user equipment can divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and downlink.
  • the PDCP entity, the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station.
  • the user equipment may further divide the RLC entity into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, where the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station.
  • the user equipment performs downlink transmission with the target base station via the first cell, and performs uplink transmission with the source base station via the second cell. Lose.
  • the source base station is a micro base station
  • the target base station is a macro base station.
  • the user equipment can rebuild and configure the uplink PDCP entity, the downlink PDCP entity, the uplink RLC entity, and the downlink RLC entity respectively in the handover process by separating the uplink and downlink of the PDCP entity or the uplink and downlink of the RLC entity. Therefore, the user equipment does not need to rebuild and configure the entire PDCP entity and the RLC entity, and can continue to communicate with the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission without switching, thereby improving handover efficiency and flexibility.
  • the uplink PDCP entity and the downlink PDCP entity, the uplink RLC entity, and the downlink RLC entity may respectively correspond to an uplink entity and a downlink entity of the RLC unacknowledged mode.
  • the user equipment may also not divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity.
  • the user equipment may correspond to the uplink transmission of the PDCP entity to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink transmission of the PDCP entity to the first cell provided by the target base station.
  • the user equipment may not divide the RLC entity into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity.
  • the user equipment may correspond to the uplink of the RLC entity to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink transmission of the RLC entity to the first cell provided by the target base station.
  • the user equipment performs downlink transmission with the target base station via the first cell, and performs uplink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
  • the source base station is a micro base station
  • the target base station is a macro base station.
  • the uplink transmission of the PDCP entity or the RLC entity is corresponding to the target base station, or the uplink transmission of the PDCP entity or the RLC entity is corresponding to the source base station.
  • the user equipment can also reconstruct and configure the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission separately. , reduce signaling overhead and implementation complexity.
  • the user equipment receives the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched allocated for the user equipment in the handover command sent by the source base station, to indicate that the user equipment switches the uplink transmission to the target cell.
  • the user equipment may perform uplink resource configuration according to the uplink resource configuration information. Specifically, the user equipment may reset the uplink of the MAC, re-establish the uplink of the PDCP entity, and re-establish the radio link control RLC entity. On the uplink, the uplink transmission of the PDCP entity and the uplink transmission of the RLC entity can be configured to reconstruct the uplink of the PDCP entity.
  • the user equipment may also reset the uplink of the MAC, re-establish the uplink of the PDCP entity, re-establish the uplink of the radio link control RLC entity, re-establish the uplink of the PDCP entity, and configure the uplink transmission and downlink transmission of the PDCP entity. And configuring the uplink and downlink transmissions of the RLC entity.
  • the uplink for resetting the MAC may include: stopping a timer configured for all MAC uplinks in operation, considering that a time alignment timer expires, and setting a new data identifier for all uplink HARQ processes (new data identifier, NDI) is 0.
  • the ongoing random access procedure is stopped, and if there is an allocated random access dedicated preamble, the allocated random access dedicated preamble is discarded, if there is already triggered
  • the scheduling request process cancels the already triggered scheduling request process, and if there is a buffer status reporting process that has been triggered, cancels the buffer status reporting process that has been triggered, and if there is already triggered power headroom reporting process, the cancellation has already been triggered.
  • the power headroom reporting process if there is an allocated temporary cell - the wireless network temporary identity, the temporary cell - Temporary C-RNTI is translated.
  • the DRB and the SRB mapped to the RLC-AM and the DRB and the SRB mapped to the RLC-UM are respectively performed according to the uplink data transmission and reconstruction process.
  • the descriptions related to the sending end of the RLC UM entity and the RLC AM entity in the RLC re-establishment respectively perform corresponding operations.
  • the handover command that is received by the user equipment may further include an indication identifier, where the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying uplink transmissions to be switched, and The downlink with the source base station is reserved. Thereby, the downlink communication between the user equipment and the source base station can be continued during the handover.
  • the indication identifier may be further used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying uplink transmissions to be switched, and reserve downlink and uplink with the source base station. road. Therefore, the downlink communication and the uplink communication between the user equipment and the source base station can be continued during the handover process, which reduces service delay or service interruption.
  • the user equipment may further divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station.
  • the user equipment may further divide the RLC entity into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, where the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station.
  • the user equipment The first cell performs uplink transmission with the target base station, and performs downlink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
  • the source base station is a macro base station
  • the target base station is a micro base station. Therefore, the uplink PDCP entity and the downlink PDCP entity, the uplink RLC entity, and the downlink RLC entity may be separately reconstructed and configured in the handover process; the entire PDCP entity and the RLC entity need not be reconstructed and configured, and the uplink transmission or downlink without handover may be performed. The transmission continues to communicate, improving switching efficiency and flexibility.
  • the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station, so that one of the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the user equipment is served by the source base station, and the other is targeted by the target.
  • the cell service provided by the base station thereby improving cell throughput and spectrum efficiency.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of another embodiment of a handover method according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 4, the embodiment provides a specific method for switching in a scenario where the source base station is a micro base station and the target base station is a macro base station. Process, the method includes:
  • the UE sends a measurement report to the Kaiji.
  • the micro base station determines, according to the measurement report, that the downlink transmission of the UE is switched from the micro base station to the first cell of the macro base station.
  • the micro base station may receive power according to a reference signal of a common reference signal (CRS) or a channel-state information reference signal (CSI-RS) of the first cell included in the measurement report.
  • the reference signal receiving power (RSRP) measurement result is greater than the RSRP measurement result of the CRS or CSI-RS of the second cell of the micro base station currently served by the UE, or when the measurement result of the first cell exceeds a certain threshold, determining the downlink of the UE
  • the transmission is handed over from the micro base station to the first cell of the macro base station.
  • the micro base station sends a handover request to the macro base station, where the handover request carries downlink transmission information.
  • the downlink transmission information may include a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover.
  • the downlink transmission information may further include one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, at least one E-RAB identifier corresponding to the E-RAB quality of service parameter, and radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control
  • the context information may include downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identity C-RNTI information of the user equipment.
  • the handover request may also have uplink radio resource dedicated configuration information, etc. Not here - enumeration.
  • the macro base station performs a radio admission control (RAC) process, and allows the downlink transmission of the UE to be switched to the first cell provided by the macro base station.
  • RAC radio admission control
  • the above admission control process indicates that the macro base station confirms whether to allow handover. For example, when the load of the macro base station is high, the macro base station can reject the handover request.
  • the admission control process described above occurs before random access. If the macro base station rejects the handover request, the source base station needs to select another base station to perform handover, and random access does not occur at the macro base station.
  • the macro base station allocates downlink resources to the UE in the first cell.
  • the foregoing first cell may be understood as a frequency band corresponding to the first cell.
  • the foregoing downlink resource can be understood as a downlink resource corresponding to the first cell.
  • the macro base station may allocate a C-RNTI to the UE, and configure a downlink resource according to the quality of service (QoS) parameter of each E-RAB.
  • the macro base station may configure the downlink resource and the uplink resource according to the QoS parameter of the E-RAB, but the UE may use only the downlink resource configuration information.
  • QoS quality of service
  • the downlink resources allocated by the macro base station to the UE may include one or any combination of the following: SRB downlink configuration information, DRB downlink configuration information, MAC downlink configuration information, and PDSCH configuration information.
  • the signaling radio bearer (SRB) downlink configuration information may include one or any combination of the following: an SRB identifier, an RLC downlink configuration, a logical channel identifier configuration information, and the like.
  • the DRB downlink configuration information may include one or any combination of the following: an evolved packet system bearer identifier, a DRB identifier, a PDCP downlink configuration, an RLC downlink configuration, a logical channel identifier configuration information, and the like.
  • the media access control (MAC) downlink configuration information may include one or any combination of the following: discontinuous reception of configuration information, SCell deactivation of timer configuration information, and the like.
  • the downlink resources allocated by the macro base station to the UE may further include one or any combination of the following: Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) report configuration information, antenna information, and the like.
  • CQI Channel Quality Indicator
  • the macro base station may not configure the physical uplink control channel and the physical uplink shared channel resource, or the macro base station may configure but not use the physical uplink control channel and the physical uplink shared channel resource.
  • the macro base station sends a handover response to the micro base station, where the handover response has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the macro base station to the UE.
  • the handover response may also carry one or any combination of the following information: at least one E-RAB ID, at least one E-RAB corresponding to a downlink general packet radio service (GPRS) tunneling protocol port (DL GTP tunnel endpoint), Acer Stand to the transparent base station of the micro base station.
  • the macro base station to the micro base station transparent container includes a handover command, that is, a radio resource connection reconfiguration message (RRC connection reconfiguration) including mobility control information, and a radio resource parameter that is required to be configured to the UE.
  • RRC connection reconfiguration radio resource connection reconfiguration message
  • the micro base station sends a handover command to the UE, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched.
  • the downlink resource configuration information may include a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover.
  • the handover command may further include an indication identifier, where the indication identifier may be used to indicate that the user equipment and the macro base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched, and reserve the downlink and uplink with the micro base station.
  • the indication identifier may also be used to indicate that the user equipment and the macro base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched and delete the downlink between the micro base station; or, the indication identifier may also be used for The user equipment and the macro base station are instructed to newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be handed over and reserve an uplink with the micro base station.
  • the micro base station sends a packet data convergence protocol service data unit (PDCP SDU) to the macro base station, and the sequence number (SN) information is sent and the RLC layer is not received. Downstream PDCP SDU.
  • PDCP SDU packet data convergence protocol service data unit
  • the sequence number information of the downlink PDCP SDU may include at least one downlink E-RAB PDCP sequence number information, which is used to indicate the sequence number that the macro base station will allocate to the downlink new PDCP SDU after the downlink handover.
  • S409 The UE performs downlink resource configuration according to the downlink resource configuration information.
  • the UE performs downlink resource configuration. For details, refer to the method embodiment corresponding to FIG. 3, which is not described herein.
  • the UE after receiving the handover command, the UE synchronizes with the macro base station in the downlink.
  • the UE After receiving the handover command, the UE synchronizes with the macro base station in the downlink.
  • the UE For a specific resource configuration process, refer to the method embodiment corresponding to FIG. 3, and details are not described herein again.
  • the UE resets the downlink of the MAC, reestablishes the downlink of the PDCP entity, and reconstructs the downlink of the RLC entity.
  • the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission of the PDCP entity and the downlink transmission of the RLC entity are configured.
  • the UE resets the downlink of the MAC, reestablishes the downlink of the PDCP entity, and reconstructs the downlink of the RLC entity; and configures the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the PDCP entity.
  • the indication identifier of the handover command sent by the micro base station to the UE in the S407 is used to indicate that the user equipment and the macro base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched and retain the downlink between the user equipment and the micro base station.
  • the UE does not need to reset the MAC downlink, and keeps the downlink of the PDCP entity and the RLC entity for downlink transmission, that is, the PDCP entity and the RLC entity that perform uplink and downlink transmission with the micro base station.
  • a schematic diagram of the UE interacting with the source base station and the target base station during handover may be as shown in FIG. 7.
  • the UE may also perform configuration such as a physical downlink shared channel.
  • the user equipment may divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station.
  • the user equipment may further divide the RLC entity into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, where the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station.
  • the PDCP entity of the UE may be separated into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity (corresponding to the second cell and the first cell, respectively), and the RLC AM entity of the UE may be separated into an uplink RLC AM entity and a downlink.
  • the RLC AM entity is two parts (corresponding to the second cell and the first cell, respectively), and the RLC UM entity of the UE is separated into two parts, a downlink RLC UM entity and an uplink RLC UM entity (corresponding to the second cell and the first cell, respectively).
  • the uplink PDCP entity and the uplink RLC entity do not perform reconfiguration and reconfiguration, and the MAC uplink does not perform operations such as resetting. Therefore, the uplink communication process between the UE and the micro base station can be continued.
  • the execution order of S408 and S409 is in no particular order, and the two can also be performed simultaneously.
  • S410. The UE sends a radio resource reconfiguration complete (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) message to the micro base station.
  • RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete radio resource reconfiguration complete
  • the UE Since the uplink remains at the source base station, the UE does not send radio resource reconfiguration to the target base station.
  • the completion message is sent, and a radio resource reconfiguration complete message is sent to the source base station.
  • the base station sends a downlink handover completion to the macro base station.
  • the source base station may determine whether to delete the downlink radio link from the source base station to the UE. If the source base station deletes the downlink radio link from the source base station to the UE, the schematic diagram of the UE interacting with the source base station and the target base station after the cell handover may be as shown in FIG. 6. If the source base station does not delete the downlink radio link from the source base station to the UE, The schematic diagram of the UE interacting with the source base station and the target base station after the cell handover may be as shown in FIG. 7.
  • an implementation scenario may be: a macro cell and a low power node (LPN) provided by the macro base station.
  • the pico cell is covered by hotspots.
  • the Pico cell can be configured with a cell range extension (CRE) or no CRE.
  • CRE cell range extension
  • the bias configuration can be 6dB or 9dB or higher.
  • the first cell provided by the macro base station and the second cell provided by the micro base station may have different physical cell identifiers (PCIs) or the same physical cell identifier.
  • PCIs physical cell identifiers
  • the micro base station may determine to switch the downlink transmission of the UE to the macro base station.
  • the handover method provided in this embodiment may also be applicable to a carrier aggregation (CA) scenario.
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • the macro base station and the micro base station provide two frequencies f1 and f2, respectively, and the macro base station and the micro base station jointly cover the area.
  • the UE aggregates the f2 provided by the macro base station and the micro base station.
  • the micro base station can configure CRE or not CRE in f2, and the offset configuration can be 6dB or 9dB or higher when configuring CRE.
  • the UE establishes a radio link with the macro cell in the downlink, and establishes a radio link in the uplink and the micro cell, in the downlink and the macro.
  • Cell communication communicating with the micro cell in the uplink. If the UE moves to the macro base station and moves out of the CRE range to enter the coverage of only the macro base station, the micro base station can switch the uplink transmission of the UE to the macro base station, so that both the uplink and the downlink of the UE communicate with the macro base station.
  • the source base station is a micro base station
  • the target base station for handover is a macro base station
  • the UE may combine the downlink PDCP entity and the uplink PDCP entity into one bidirectional PDCP entity.
  • the downlink RLC AM entity and the uplink RLC may be used.
  • the AM entities are combined into one bidirectional RLC AM entity.
  • the process of switching the uplink transmission of the UE to the macro base station is similar to the process of S401-S411, and details are not described herein again.
  • the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station, so that one of the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the user equipment is served by the source base station, and the other is targeted by the target.
  • the cell service provided by the base station can enable the user equipment to send uplink data to the micro base station with a lower power, and the macro base station can send downlink data to the user equipment with a stronger transmission power, thereby improving cell throughput and spectrum efficiency.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of another embodiment of a handover method according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 9, with respect to the foregoing method embodiments, the embodiment provides a scenario in which a source base station is a macro base station, and a target base station is a micro base station. The specific process of switching the method, the method includes:
  • S901 The UE sends a measurement report to the Acer account.
  • the macro base station determines, according to the measurement report, that the uplink transmission of the UE is switched from the macro base station to the first cell of the micro base station.
  • the macro base station may be based on the downlink path loss of the CRS or CSI-RS of the micro base station.
  • the downlink pathloss measurement result is greater than the downlink pathloss measurement result of the CRS or CSI-RS of the macro base station, or the downlink path loss measurement result of the CRS or CSI-RS of the micro base station exceeds a certain threshold, and is determined.
  • the uplink transmission of the UE is switched from the micro base station to the first cell of the micro base station; the macro base station may be based on the power headroom (PHR) reported by the UE or the uplink path loss measurement or sounding reference signal of the UE.
  • PHR power headroom
  • the downlink path loss of the UE is estimated by means of measurement or the like.
  • the macro base station sends a handover request to the micro base station, where the handover request has uplink transmission information.
  • the uplink transmission information may include a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the uplink transmission information may also include one or any combination of the following: at least one
  • the E-RAB identifier, the E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and the radio resource control context information may include: uplink radio resource specific configuration information and/or user equipment cell-wireless
  • the network temporarily identifies the C-RNTI information.
  • the handover request may also have downlink radio resource specific configuration information and the like, which are not enumerated here. 5904.
  • the micro base station performs an admission control process, and allows the uplink transmission of the UE to be switched to the first cell of the micro base station.
  • the base station allocates uplink resources to the UE in the first cell.
  • the micro base station may allocate a C-RNTI to the UE, and configure an uplink resource according to the QoS parameters of each E-RAB.
  • the micro base station may configure the downlink resource and the uplink resource according to the QoS parameter of the E-RAB, but the UE may use only the uplink resource configuration information.
  • the uplink resources allocated by the micro base station to the UE may include one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink configuration information, DRB uplink configuration information, MAC uplink configuration information, and PDSCH configuration information.
  • the signaling radio bearer (SRB) uplink configuration information may include one or any combination of the following: an SRB identifier, an RLC uplink configuration, a logical channel identifier, and a logical channel uplink configuration information.
  • the DRB uplink configuration information may include one or any combination of the following: an evolved packet system bearer identifier, a DRB identifier, a PDCP uplink configuration, an RLC uplink configuration, a logical channel identifier, a logical channel uplink configuration information, and the like.
  • the MAC uplink configuration information may include one or any combination of the following: uplink shared transport channel (UL-SCH) configuration information, time adjustment timer configuration information, power headroom report configuration information, and the like.
  • UL-SCH uplink shared transport channel
  • the uplink resource allocated by the micro base station to the UE may further include one or any combination of the following: an uplink physical shared channel, an uplink physical control channel, an uplink power control parameter, a sounding reference signal parameter (SRS), an antenna information, and the like.
  • an uplink physical shared channel an uplink physical control channel
  • an uplink power control parameter an uplink power control parameter
  • a sounding reference signal parameter SRS
  • the base station may not configure the physical downlink control channel and the physical downlink shared channel resource, or the micro base station may configure but not use the physical downlink control channel and the physical downlink shared channel resource.
  • the micro base station sends a handover response to the macro base station, where the handover response has uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched allocated by the micro base station to the UE.
  • the handover response message may further carry one or any combination of the following information: at least one E-RAB ID, at least one E-RAB corresponding to an uplink general packet radio service (GPRS) tunneling protocol port (UL GTP tunnel endpoint), Micro base station to transparent base station transparent container (transparent contaiinsr).
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • the micro base station to the macro base station transparent container includes a handover command.
  • the radio resource connection reconfiguration message of the mobility control information includes a radio resource parameter that needs to be configured to the UE.
  • the macro base station sends a handover command to the UE, where the handover command is sent.
  • the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched allocated by the micro base station to the UE is included.
  • the uplink resource configuration information may include a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the handover command may further include an indication identifier, where the indication identifier may be used to indicate that the user equipment and the micro base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched, and reserve an uplink between the user equipment and the macro base station. And indicating that the user equipment and the macro base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched and deleting the uplink between the user equipment and the micro base station; or It can also be used to indicate that the user equipment and the micro base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be handed over and reserve the downlink between the macro base station and the macro base station.
  • the indication identifier may be used to indicate that the user equipment and the micro base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched, and reserve an uplink between the user equipment and the macro base station.
  • the macro base station sends the sequence number (SN) information of the uplink PDCP SDU to the micro base station and forwards the successfully received uplink PDCP SDU.
  • SN sequence number
  • the sequence number information of the uplink PDCP SDU may include the sequence number of the first lost uplink PDCP SDU.
  • the UE performs uplink resource configuration according to the uplink resource configuration information.
  • the UE After receiving the handover command, the UE synchronizes with the micro base station in the uplink.
  • the uplink timing advance value may be directly sent to the UE through the random access procedure or the micro base station to achieve synchronization.
  • the UE resets the MAC uplink, reestablishes the uplink of the PDCP entity, and reconstructs the uplink of the RLC entity.
  • the uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission of the PDCP entity and the uplink transmission of the RLC entity are configured.
  • the UE resets the MAC uplink, reestablishes the uplink of the PDCP entity, and reestablishes the uplink of the RLC entity; configures the uplink and downlink resources corresponding to the uplink and downlink transmissions of the PDCP entity, and the uplink of the RLC entity. Uplink resources and downlink resources corresponding to transmission and downlink transmission.
  • the indication identifier carried in the handover command of the macro base station transmitting the handover command to the UE in S907 is used to indicate that the user equipment and the micro base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched, and retain the between the user equipment and the macro base station.
  • the UE does not need to reset the MAC uplink, and the PDCP entity of the original SRB and the DRB is uplinked and the RLC entity is uplinked, that is, the PDCP entity of the SRB and the DRB that performs uplink and downlink transmission with the macro base station.
  • Uplink and RLC entity uplinks do not need to be re-established and reconfigured.
  • the PDCP entity and the RLC entity uplink transmit corresponding uplink resources, and configure MAC layer uplink transmission parameters.
  • a schematic diagram of the UE interacting with the source base station and the target base station during handover may be as shown in FIG.
  • the UE can also perform configuration such as a physical uplink shared channel.
  • the user equipment may divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, where the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station.
  • the user equipment may further divide the RLC entity into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, where the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station.
  • the downlink downlink operation process between the UE and the micro base station can be performed because the downlink downlink PDCP entity and the downlink RLC entity do not perform reconstruction and reconfiguration, and the MAC downlink does not perform operations such as resetting. keep going.
  • the execution order of S908 and S909 is in no particular order, and the two can also be performed simultaneously.
  • the UE sends a radio resource reconfiguration complete (RRC connection reconfiguration complete) message to the micro base station.
  • RRC connection reconfiguration complete radio resource reconfiguration complete
  • the UE Since the uplink is handed over to the target base station, the UE transmits a radio resource reconfiguration complete message to the target base station.
  • the macro base station sends an uplink handover completion to the micro base station.
  • the switching method provided in this embodiment is similar to the heterogeneous network scenario provided in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and is not described here.
  • the user equipment is in an RRC connected state (RRC_connected), and has an RRC connection with the source base station before the handover.
  • the user equipment may be in an idle state (RRCJdle).
  • the user equipment may initiate a random access request to one of the macro base station and the micro base station to establish an RRC connection with the macro base station or the micro base station.
  • the UE may select the macro cell or the pico cell to perform a random access procedure to enter the RRC_Connected state. If the UE first accesses the macro base station, the macro base station as the source base station may determine to switch the uplink transmission of the UE to the micro base station according to the measurement report of the UE, that is, perform the handover procedure of the embodiment shown in FIG. If the UE accesses the micro base station first, the micro base station as the source base station may determine to switch the downlink transmission of the UE to the UE according to the measurement report of the UE. The macro base station, i.e., performs the handover procedure of the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the UE establishes a radio link with the macro cell in the downlink, and establishes a radio link in the uplink and the micro cell, in the downlink and the macro.
  • Cell communication communicating with the micro cell in the uplink. If the UE moves to the micro base station and moves out of the CRE range to enter the coverage of only the micro base station, the macro base station can switch the downlink transmission of the UE to the micro base station, so that both the uplink and the downlink of the UE communicate with the micro base station.
  • the source base station is a macro base station
  • the target base station for handover is a micro base station.
  • the UE can combine the downlink PDCP entity and the uplink PDCP entity into one bidirectional PDCP entity.
  • the downlink RLC AM entity and the uplink RLC AM entity can be combined into one bidirectional RLC AM. entity.
  • the process of switching the downlink transmission of the UE to the micro base station is similar to the process of S901-S911, and details are not described herein again.
  • the source base station may determine whether to delete the uplink radio link from the source base station to the UE. If the source base station deletes the uplink radio link from the source base station to the UE, the schematic diagram of the UE interacting with the source base station and the target base station after the cell handover may be as shown in FIG. 10, if the source base station does not delete the uplink radio link from the source base station to the UE, The schematic diagram of the UE interacting with the source base station and the target base station after the cell handover may be as shown in FIG. 11.
  • the UE for the UE located in the macro cell provided by the macro base station and the micro cell edge provided by the micro base station, the UE establishes a radio link with the macro cell in the downlink, and establishes a wireless connection between the uplink and the micro cell.
  • the link is in the downlink and communicates with the macro cell.
  • the DRB of the user equipment can be carried by the macro base station and the micro base station on the S1-U interface with the core network SGW and the S1 bearer (S1 bearer)
  • the evolved radio access bearer E-RAB is a bearer between the UE and the SGW, including a data radio bearer DRB between the UE and the base station, and an S1 bearer between the base station and the SGW, DRB and S1 bearer— - Correspondence, thereby establishing a data link between the UE and the SGW, as shown in FIG.
  • the process of establishing the mapping is briefly described as follows:
  • the mobility management entity (MME) and the eNB establish an E-RAB when the S1 interface is established, and include the E-RAB identification information.
  • the eNB configures the radio resource for the UE, the eNB adds the information of the DRB.
  • the E-RAB identifier is included, and the DRB identifier is assigned to the DRB, so that a mapping relationship is established between the DRB and the S1 bearer.
  • the mapping between the S1 bearer and the S1 bearer may be established on the S1-U interface with the core network SGW by using one of the macro base station and the micro base station, and the macro base station and the base station establish the foregoing by interacting with the E-RAB identifier and the DRB identification information.
  • the mapping relationship is as shown in Figure 13.
  • the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station, so that one of the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the user equipment is served by the source base station, and the other is targeted by the target.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a base station according to the present invention.
  • the base station may perform a method according to any embodiment of the present invention, where the base station is, for example, a source base station or other similar device with cross-station coordination function;
  • the base station includes: a determining unit 11 and a sending unit 12; the determining unit 11 is configured to determine to switch downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell or switch uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell;
  • the sending unit 12 is configured to send a handover request to the target base station corresponding to the first cell, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
  • the sending unit 12 is further configured to send, to the user equipment, a handover command, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated for the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so that the user after the handover
  • the device maintains uplink transmission with the base station and performs downlink transmission via the target base station, or the user equipment maintains downlink transmission with the base station after handover and performs uplink transmission via the target base station;
  • the downlink transmission information and the downlink resource configuration information include a handover type indication for indicating downlink transmission switching, or the uplink transmission information and the uplink resource configuration information include a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the determining unit 11 may be specifically configured to: when the base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station, determine to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell served by the macro base station; or, when the base station is the Acer base station When the target base station is a micro base station, it is determined to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell served by the micro base station.
  • the first cell covers a cell corresponding to the base station that provides the service to the user equipment before the handover, or the frequency provided by the macro base station and the micro base station overlap;
  • the sending unit 12 is further configured to: send a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station, where the allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate, to the user equipment, the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched in the first cell or to be switched.
  • the uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission is further configured to: send a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station, where the allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate, to the user equipment, the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched in the first cell or to be switched.
  • the sending unit 12 is further configured to: send a media access control layer control unit MAC CE to the user equipment, where the MAC CE is used to indicate whether to allow uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation.
  • a media access control layer control unit MAC CE to the user equipment, where the MAC CE is used to indicate whether to allow uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation.
  • the downlink transmission information further includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identifier, at least one E-RAB identifier corresponding E-RAB QoS parameter, and radio resource control context information.
  • the radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource dedicated configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI information of the user terminal;
  • the uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, an E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; where the radio resource control context information includes: Radio resource specific configuration information and/or C-RNTI information of the user terminal.
  • the downlink resource configuration information that is allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: signaling radio bearer SRB downlink configuration information, data radio bearer DRB downlink configuration information, media access control MAC downlink configuration information, and physical downlink
  • the shared channel PDSCH configuration information includes: one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink configuration information, DRB uplink configuration information, MAC uplink configuration information, PUSCH configuration information.
  • the handover command further includes an indication identifier; the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be handed over and reserve an uplink with the base station; or
  • the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be handed over and reserve the downlink between the base station and the base station;
  • the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying downlink transmissions to be switched or newly establish an uplink for carrying uplink transmissions to be switched, and reserve uplink and downlink with the base station. link.
  • the base station provided in this embodiment is the execution device of the handover method provided by the present invention.
  • the base station provided by this embodiment is a source base station, and switches uplink transmission or downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station according to the measurement report reported by the user equipment, so that one of the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the user equipment is provided by the source base station.
  • Cell server another cell service provided by the target base station.
  • the user equipment may send uplink data to the micro base station at a lower power
  • the macro base station may send downlink data to the user equipment with a stronger transmission power.
  • the micro-base station transmits downlink data to the user equipment with lower power, and the user equipment sends the uplink data to the macro base station with higher power.
  • the interference of the base station to the UE can be reduced, thereby improving the cell throughput and the spectrum efficiency.
  • This embodiment provides a method for switching uplink or downlink transmission of a user equipment to a target base station, so that uplink and downlink of the user equipment communicate with different base stations, and the method is applicable to existing carrier types and new carriers.
  • Type new carrier type, NCT
  • the new carrier type may or may not send the primary synchronization signal/secondary synchronization signal, etc.
  • E-PDCCH enhanced physical downlink control channel
  • - PDCCH performs cross scheduling.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a base station according to the present invention.
  • the base station may perform a method according to any embodiment of the present invention, where the base station is, for example, a target base station or other similar device with cross-station coordination function; As shown, the base station includes: a receiving unit 21, a determining unit 22, and a transmitting unit 23;
  • the receiving unit 21 is configured to receive a handover request message sent by the source base station, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
  • the determining unit 22 is configured to determine that the downlink transmission or the uplink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the first cell provided by the base station;
  • the sending unit 23 is configured to send, to the source base station, the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated for the user equipment or the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so that the user equipment maintains the uplink with the source base station after the handover.
  • the downlink transmission is performed by the base station, or the downlink transmission is performed by the user equipment and the uplink transmission is performed by the base station, and the downlink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating downlink transmission handover, or The transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the first cell covers the switch before the handover.
  • the source base station is a macro base station
  • the base station is a micro base station
  • the cell corresponding to the source base station that provides the service to the user equipment before the handover covers the first cell, or the frequency provided by the macro base station and the micro base station overlap.
  • the receiving unit 21 is further configured to receive a radio resource allocation request message sent by the source base station, where the radio resource allocation request message is used by the base station to allocate, to the user equipment, the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched, or The uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
  • the downlink transmission information further includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identifier, at least one E-RAB identifier corresponding E-RAB QoS parameter, and radio resource control context information.
  • the radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI information of the user equipment;
  • the uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, an E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; where the radio resource control context information includes: Radio resource specific configuration information and/or C-RNTI information of the user equipment.
  • the base station provided in this embodiment is the execution device of the handover method provided by the present invention.
  • the specific process of performing the handover method refer to the related description in the method embodiment corresponding to FIG. 1 to FIG. 13 , and details are not described herein again.
  • the base station provided in this embodiment is a target base station, and the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station according to the measurement report reported by the user equipment, and the target base station may allow the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the target base station. Therefore, one of the uplink and downlink transmissions of the user equipment is served by the cell provided by the source base station, and the other is provided by the target base station, thereby improving cell throughput and spectrum efficiency.
  • Figure 16 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a user equipment provided by the present invention. As shown in Figure 16, the user equipment includes: a receiving unit 31 and a configuration unit 32;
  • the receiving unit 31 is configured to receive a handover command sent by the source base station, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched;
  • the configuration unit 32 is configured to perform downlink resource configuration according to downlink resource configuration information, maintain uplink transmission with the source base station after the handover, and perform downlink transmission via the target base station, or perform uplink resource configuration according to the uplink resource configuration information, and maintain the source base station after the handover. Downlink transmission between each other and uplink transmission via the target base station;
  • the downlink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the handover command further includes an indication identifier; the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be handed over and reserve an uplink relationship with the source base station; or
  • the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be handed over and reserve the downlink with the source base station;
  • the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be handed over or newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be handed over, and reserve the uplink between the source and the base station. Downlink.
  • the user equipment further includes a dividing unit 33, configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink PDCP entity and the target base station provide Corresponding to the first cell; the RLC entity is divided into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, where the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station;
  • the user equipment performs downlink transmission with the target base station via the first cell, and performs uplink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
  • the source base station is a micro base station
  • the target base station is a macro base station.
  • the dividing unit 33 is further configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink PDCP entity and the second cell provided by the source base station Corresponding
  • the RLC entity is divided into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, and the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station;
  • the user equipment performs uplink transmission with the target base station via the first cell, and performs downlink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
  • the source base station is a macro base station
  • the target base station is a micro base station.
  • the user equipment provided in this embodiment is the execution device of the handover method provided by the present invention.
  • the specific process of performing the handover method reference may be made to the related description in the method embodiment corresponding to FIG. 1 to FIG. 13 , and details are not described herein again.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a base station according to the present invention.
  • the base station may perform a method according to any embodiment of the present invention, where the base station is, for example, a source base station or other similar device with cross-station coordination function; As shown, the base station includes: a processor 41 and a transmitter 42;
  • the processor 41 is configured to determine to switch downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell or switch uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell;
  • the transmitter 42 is configured to send a handover request to the target base station corresponding to the first cell, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
  • the transmitter 42 is further configured to send a handover command to the user equipment, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated for the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so as to switch the user.
  • the device maintains uplink transmission with the base station and performs downlink transmission via the target base station, or the user equipment maintains downlink transmission with the base station after handover and performs uplink transmission via the target base station;
  • the downlink transmission information and the downlink resource configuration information include a handover type indication for indicating downlink transmission switching, or the uplink transmission information and the uplink resource configuration information include a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the processor 41 is specifically configured to: when the base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station, determine to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell served by the macro base station; or, when the base station is the Acer base station When the target base station is a micro base station, it is determined to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell served by the micro base station.
  • the first cell covers a cell corresponding to the base station that provides the service to the user equipment before the handover, or the frequency provided by the macro base station and the micro base station is Overlapping
  • the base station is a macro base station
  • the target base station is a micro base station
  • the cell corresponding to the base station serving the user equipment before the handover covers the first cell, or the frequency provided by the macro base station and the micro base station overlap.
  • the transmitter 42 is further configured to: send a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station, where the allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate, to the user equipment, the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched in the first cell or to be switched.
  • the uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission is further configured to: send a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station, where the allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate, to the user equipment, the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched in the first cell or to be switched.
  • the uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission is further configured to: send a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station, where the allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate, to the user equipment, the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched in the first cell or to be switched.
  • the uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission is further configured to: send a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station, where the allocation request message is used
  • the transmitter 42 is further configured to: send a media access control layer control unit MAC CE to the user equipment, where the MAC CE is used to indicate whether to allow uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation.
  • a media access control layer control unit MAC CE to the user equipment, where the MAC CE is used to indicate whether to allow uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation.
  • the downlink transmission information further includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identifier, at least one E-RAB identifier corresponding E-RAB QoS parameter, and radio resource control context information.
  • the radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource dedicated configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI information of the user terminal;
  • the uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, an E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; where the radio resource control context information includes: Radio resource specific configuration information and/or C-RNTI information of the user terminal.
  • the downlink resource configuration information that is allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: signaling radio bearer SRB downlink configuration information, data radio bearer DRB downlink configuration information, media access control MAC downlink configuration information, and physical downlink
  • the shared channel PDSCH configuration information includes: one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink configuration information, DRB uplink configuration information, MAC uplink configuration information, PUSCH configuration information.
  • the handover command further includes an indication identifier, where the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be handed over and reserve an uplink with the base station; or
  • the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be handed over and reserve the downlink between the base station and the base station;
  • the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying downlink transmissions to be switched or newly establish an uplink for carrying uplink transmissions to be switched, and reserve uplink and downlink with the base station. link.
  • the base station provided in this embodiment is the execution device of the handover method provided by the present invention. For the specific process of performing the handover method, refer to the related description in the method embodiment corresponding to FIG. 1 to FIG. 13 , and details are not described herein again.
  • the base station provided by this embodiment is a source base station, and switches uplink transmission or downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station according to the measurement report reported by the user equipment, so that one of the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the user equipment is provided by the source base station.
  • the cell server, another cell service provided by the target base station improves cell throughput and spectral efficiency.
  • This embodiment provides a method for switching uplink or downlink transmission of a user equipment to a target base station, so that uplink and downlink of the user equipment communicate with different base stations, and the method is applicable to existing carrier types and new carriers.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a base station according to the present invention.
  • the base station may perform a method according to any embodiment of the present invention, where the base station is, for example, a target base station or other similar device having cross-station coordination function;
  • the base station includes: a receiver 51, a processor 52, and a transmitter 53;
  • the receiver 51 is configured to receive a handover request message sent by the source base station, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
  • the processor 52 is configured to determine that the downlink transmission or the uplink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the first cell provided by the base station;
  • the transmitter 53 is configured to send, to the source base station, the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated for the user equipment or the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so that the user equipment maintains the uplink with the source base station after the handover. Transmitting and performing downlink transmission via the base station, or so that the user equipment maintains downlink transmission with the source base station after handover and performs uplink transmission via the base station;
  • the downlink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the first cell covers a cell corresponding to the source base station that provides the service to the user equipment before the handover, or the frequency provided by the macro base station and the micro base station overlap;
  • the source base station is a macro base station, and the base station is a micro base station, the cell corresponding to the source base station that provides the service to the user equipment before the handover covers the first cell, or the frequency provided by the macro base station and the micro base station overlap.
  • the receiver 51 is further configured to: receive a radio resource allocation request message sent by the source base station, where the radio resource allocation request message is used by the base station to allocate, to the user equipment, the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched, or The uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
  • the downlink transmission information further includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identifier, at least one E-RAB identifier corresponding E-RAB QoS parameter, and radio resource control context information.
  • the radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI information of the user equipment;
  • the uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, an E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; where the radio resource control context information includes: Radio resource specific configuration information and/or C-RNTI information of the user equipment.
  • the base station provided in this embodiment is the execution device of the handover method provided by the present invention.
  • the specific process of performing the handover method refer to the related description in the method embodiment corresponding to FIG. 1 to FIG. 13 , and details are not described herein again.
  • the base station provided in this embodiment is a target base station, and the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station according to the measurement report reported by the user equipment, and the target base station may allow the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the target base station. Therefore, one of the uplink and downlink transmissions of the user equipment is served by the cell provided by the source base station, and the other is provided by the target base station, thereby improving cell throughput and spectrum efficiency.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a user equipment according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 19, the user equipment includes: a receiver 61 and a processor 62;
  • the receiver 61 is configured to receive a handover command sent by the source base station, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched;
  • the processor 62 is configured to perform downlink resource configuration according to downlink resource configuration information, maintain uplink transmission with the source base station after the handover, and perform downlink transmission via the target base station; or Perform uplink resource configuration, maintain downlink transmission with the source base station after handover, and perform uplink transmission via the target base station;
  • the downlink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
  • the handover command further includes an indication identifier; the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be handed over and reserve an uplink relationship with the source base station; or
  • the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be handed over and reserve the downlink with the source base station;
  • the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be handed over or newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be handed over, and reserve the uplink between the source and the base station. Downlink.
  • the processor 62 is further configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station
  • the user equipment divides the RLC entity into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station;
  • the user equipment performs downlink transmission with the target base station via the first cell, and performs uplink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
  • the source base station is a base station
  • the target base station is a macro base station.
  • the processor 62 is further configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station ;
  • the RLC entity is divided into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, and the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station;
  • the user equipment performs uplink transmission with the target base station via the first cell, and performs downlink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
  • the source base station is a micro base station
  • the target base station is a macro base station.
  • the user equipment provided in this embodiment is an execution device of the handover method provided by the present invention, and the implementation thereof For the specific process of the line switching method, refer to the related description in the method embodiment corresponding to FIG. 1 to FIG. 13 , and details are not described again.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a communication system according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 20, the communication system includes:
  • the target base station 72 in any of the above embodiments.
  • the operations performed by the source base station refer to the operations performed by the source base station in the foregoing method embodiment or the device embodiment.
  • the action performed by the target base station may refer to the action performed by the target base station in the foregoing method embodiment or the device embodiment. I will not repeat them here.
  • the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station
  • the target base station may allow the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the target base station, thereby enabling the uplink and downlink of the user equipment.
  • the disclosed system, apparatus, and method may be implemented in other manners.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of the unit or unit is only a logical function division.
  • there may be another division manner for example, multiple units or components may be used. Combined or can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not executed.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interface, device or unit.
  • the coupling or communication connection can be in electrical, mechanical or other form.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solution of the embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of a software function unit.
  • the integrated unit if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product, may be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the instructions include a plurality of instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present application.
  • the foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a removable hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk or an optical disk, and the like, which can store program code. .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The embodiments of the present invention relate to a switching method and device. The method comprises: a source base station determining to switch downlink transmission of a user equipment to a first cell or to switch uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell; the source base station sending a switching request to a target base station corresponding to the first cell, the switching request having information about the downlink transmission or information about the uplink transmission to be switched of the user equipment; and the source base station sending a switching command to the user equipment, the switching command having information about a downlink resource configuration allocated for the user equipment corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or information about an uplink resource configuration corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched. Thus, one of the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the user equipment is provided with a cell service by the source base station, and the other is provided with a cell service by the target base station, thereby improving the cell throughput and the spectrum efficiency.

Description

切换方法和设备  Switching method and device
技术领域 本发明实施例涉及通信技术领域, 特别涉及一种切换方法和设备。 背景技术 在异构网( Heterogeneous network, Hetnet )中 ,在宏基站 ( macro base station )覆盖范围内布局一些低功率网络节点 ( low power node, LPN , ) 以 提供热点覆盖, 增加小区容量和进行负荷均衡等。 The present invention relates to the field of communications technologies, and in particular, to a handover method and device. BACKGROUND In Heterogeneous Network (Hetnet), some low power nodes (LPNs) are deployed in the coverage of a macro base station to provide hotspot coverage, increase cell capacity and load Balance and so on.
现有技术中, 通过为微小区 (pico cell )设置小区范围扩展(cell range extension , CRE )的方法将宏小区( macro Cell )的用户设备( user equipment, UE )切换到微小区, 在 CRE范围的 UE接入微小区, 以微小区作为服务小 区 ( serving cell ), 下行和上行均由微小区提供服务。 然而, 这种技术中, 为 了降低宏小区对 UE下行的干扰, 宏小区在设置的几乎空子帧(almost blank subframes, ABS )不发送或低功率发送控制信令和用户数据从而降低了小区 吞吐量和频谱效率。 发明内容 本发明提供一种切换方法和设备, 以提高小区吞吐量和频谱效率。  In the prior art, a user equipment (UE) of a macro cell is switched to a micro cell by setting a cell range extension (CRE) for a pico cell, in a CRE range. The UE accesses the micro cell, and the micro cell serves as a serving cell, and both the downlink and the uplink are served by the micro cell. However, in this technique, in order to reduce the interference of the macro cell to the downlink of the UE, the macro cell transmits the control signaling and the user data without transmitting or low power in the set almost blank subframes (ABS), thereby reducing the cell throughput. And spectral efficiency. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention provides a handover method and apparatus to improve cell throughput and spectrum efficiency.
本发明的第一方面提供了一种切换方法, 包括:  A first aspect of the present invention provides a handover method, including:
源基站确定将用户设备的下行传输切换至第一小区或者将用户设备的上 行传输切换至第一小区;  The source base station determines to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell or to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell;
所述源基站向所述第一小区对应的目标基站发送切换请求, 所述切换请 求具有所述用户设备待切换的下行传输信息或上行传输信息;  The source base station sends a handover request to the target base station corresponding to the first cell, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
所述源基站向所述用户设备发送切换命令, 所述切换命令具有为所述用 户设备分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行 传输对应的上行资源配置信息, 以便切换后所述用户设备保持与所述源基站 的所述上行传输且所述用户设备经由所述目标基站进行所述下行传输, 或切 换后所述用户设备保持与所述源基站间的所述下行传输且经由所述目标基站 进行所述上行传输; The source base station sends a handover command to the user equipment, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so that After the handover, the user equipment maintains the uplink transmission with the source base station, and the user equipment performs the downlink transmission via the target base station, or the user equipment maintains the foregoing relationship with the source base station after handover Downlink transmission and via the target base station Performing the uplink transmission;
其中, 所述下行传输信息和所述下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下 行传输切换的切换类型指示, 或, 所述上行传输信息和所述上行资源配置信 息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指示。  The downlink transmission information and the downlink resource configuration information include a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink transmission information and the uplink resource configuration information include an indication for performing uplink transmission handover. Switch type indication.
结合第一方面, 在第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述源基站确 定将所述用户设备的下行传输切换至第一小区, 具体包括: 当所述源基站为 微基站, 所述目标基站为宏基站时, 所述微基站确定将所述用户设备的下行 传输切换至由所述宏基站提供服务的所述第一小区; 或, 所述源基站确定将 所述用户设备的上行传输切换至第一小区, 具体包括: 当所述源基站为宏基 站, 所述目标基站为微基站时, 所述宏基站确定将所述用户设备的上行传输 切换至由所述微基站提供服务的所述第一小区。  With reference to the first aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the determining, by the source base station, the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell, specifically: when the source base station is a micro base station, When the target base station is a macro base station, the micro base station determines to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell served by the macro base station; or the source base station determines that the user equipment is to be used. The uplink transmission is switched to the first cell, and the method includes: when the source base station is a macro base station, and the target base station is a micro base station, the macro base station determines to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment to be used by the micro base station The first cell providing the service.
结合第一方面, 或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第 二种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一小区与切换前向所述用户设备提供服务的 所述源基站对应的小区的覆盖范围有重叠; 或, 所述目标基站与所述源基站 的频率有重叠。  With reference to the first aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in the second possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the first cell and the service that provides a service to the user equipment before the handover The coverage of the cell corresponding to the source base station overlaps; or, the frequency of the target base station overlaps with the frequency of the source base station.
结合第一方面, 第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或第一方面的第二 种可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述源基站向 所述目标基站发送切换请求消息之前, 还包括: 所述源基站向所述目标基站 发送无线资源分配请求消息, 所述分配请求消息用于所述目标基站在所述第 一小区中为所述用户设备分配待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源或者待切换 的上行传输对应的上行资源。  With reference to the first aspect, the first possible implementation manner of the first aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the first aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the source base station Before the target base station sends the handover request message, the method further includes: the source base station sending a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station, where the allocation request message is used by the target base station in the first cell as the user The device allocates a downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or an uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
结合第一方面, 第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 第一方面的第二种 可能的实现方式, 或第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第四 种可能的实现方式中, 还包括: 所述源基站向所述用户设备发送媒体接入控 制层控制单元 MAC CE,所述 MAC CE用于指示是否允许上行传输和下行传 输分离。  With reference to the first aspect, the first possible implementation of the first aspect, the second possible implementation of the first aspect, or the third possible implementation of the first aspect, the fourth In a possible implementation, the method further includes: the source base station sending, to the user equipment, a medium access control layer control unit MAC CE, where the MAC CE is used to indicate whether to allow uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation.
结合第一方面, 或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第一方面的第四 种可能的实现方法中的任意一种可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第五种可能 的实现方式中, 所述下行传输信息还包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 演进的无线接入承载 E-RAB标识、所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB 服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文 信息包括:下行无线资源专用配置信息和 /或所述用户设备的小区 -无线网络临 时标识 C-RNTI信息; 所述上行传输信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少 一个 E-RAB标识、 所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 上行 无线资源专用配置信息和 /或所述用户设备的 C-RNTI信息。 With reference to the first aspect, or the first possible implementation of the first aspect to any one of the possible implementations of the fourth possible implementation of the first aspect, the fifth possible implementation of the first aspect In the manner, the downlink transmission information further includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identifier, and the E-RAB corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier a service quality parameter, a radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI information of the user equipment; The information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, an E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; where the radio resource control context information includes : uplink radio resource specific configuration information and/or C-RNTI information of the user equipment.
结合第一方面, 或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第一方面的第五 种可能的实现方法中的任意一种可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第六种可能 的实现方式中, 所述为所述用户设备分配的下行资源配置信息包括以下一种 或任意种组合: 信令无线承载 SRB下行配置信息、 数据无线承载 DRB下行 配置信息、 媒体接入控制 MAC 下行配置信息、 物理下行共享信道 PDSCH 配置信息; 所述为所述用户设备分配的上行资源配置信息包括以下一种或任 意种组合: SRB上行配置信息、 DRB上行配置信息、 MAC上行配置信息、 PUSCH配置信息。  With reference to the first aspect, or the first possible implementation of the first aspect to any one of the possible implementations of the fifth possible implementation of the first aspect, the sixth possible implementation of the first aspect In the mode, the downlink resource configuration information that is allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: signaling radio bearer SRB downlink configuration information, data radio bearer DRB downlink configuration information, and media access control MAC downlink configuration information. The physical downlink shared channel PDSCH configuration information; the uplink resource configuration information allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink configuration information, DRB uplink configuration information, MAC uplink configuration information, and PUSCH configuration information.
结合第一方面, 或第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第一方面的第六 种可能的实现方法中的任意一种可能的实现方式, 在第一方面的第七种可能 的实现方式中, 所述切换命令中还包括指示标识; 所述指示标识用于指示所 述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述待切换的下行传输的下行链路 并保留与所述源基站之间的上行链路; 或, 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户 设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述待切换的上行传输的上行链路并保留 与所述源基站之间的下行链路; 或, 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与 所述目标基站新建用于承载所述待切换的下行传输的下行链路或新建用于承 载所述待切换的上行传输的上行链路, 并保留与所述源基站之间的上行链路 和下行链路。  With reference to the first aspect, or the first possible implementation of the first aspect to any one of the possible implementations of the sixth possible implementation of the first aspect, the seventh possible implementation of the first aspect In the mode, the handover command further includes an indication identifier, where the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched and retain the source. An uplink between the base stations; or, the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched and reserve with the source base station The downlink identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched or newly establish an uplink transmission for carrying the to-be-switched Uplink and reserve uplink and downlink with the source base station.
本发明的第二方面提供一种切换方法, 包括:  A second aspect of the present invention provides a handover method, including:
目标基站接收源基站发送的切换请求, 所述切换请求具有用户设备待切 换的下行传输信息或上行传输信息;  The target base station receives a handover request sent by the source base station, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
所述目标基站确定允许所述用户设备的下行传输或上行传输切换至所述 目标基站提供的第一小区;  Determining, by the target base station, that the downlink transmission or the uplink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the first cell provided by the target base station;
所述目标基站向所述源基站发送为所述用户设备分配的待切换的下行传 输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源配置信 息, 以便切换后所述用户设备保持与所述源基站的所述上行传输且经由所述 目标基站进行所述下行传输, 或以便切换后所述用户设备保持与所述源基站 间的所述下行传输且经由所述目标基站进行所述上行传输; Sending, by the target base station, the downlink transmission to be switched allocated to the user equipment to the source base station Transmitting the corresponding downlink resource configuration information or the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so that the user equipment maintains the uplink transmission with the source base station and performs the downlink transmission via the target base station after the handover, Or the user equipment maintains the downlink transmission with the source base station after the handover and performs the uplink transmission via the target base station;
其中, 所述下行传输信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类型指 示, 或者, 所述上行传输信息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指 示。  The downlink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
结合第二方面, 在第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述目标基站 确定允许所述用户设备的下行传输切换至所述目标基站提供的第一小区, 具 体包括: 当所述源基站为微基站, 所述目标基站为宏基站时, 所述目标基站 确定允许所述用户设备的下行传输切换至所述目标基站提供的第一小区;或, 所述目标基站确定允许所述用户设备的上行传输切换至所述目标基站提供的 第一小区, 具体包括: 当所述源基站为宏基站, 所述目标基站为微基站时, 所述目标基站确定允许所述用户设备的上行传输切换至所述目标基站提供的 第一小区。  With reference to the second aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the determining, by the target base station, that the downlink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the first cell provided by the target base station, includes: The source base station is a micro base station, and when the target base station is a macro base station, the target base station determines that the downlink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the first cell provided by the target base station; or the target base station determines to allow the The uplink transmission of the user equipment is switched to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the method includes: when the source base station is a macro base station, and the target base station is a micro base station, the target base station determines to allow uplink of the user equipment. The transmission is switched to the first cell provided by the target base station.
结合第二方面, 或第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第二方面的第 二种可能的实现方式中, 所述目标基站接收源基站发送的切换请求之前, 还 包括: 所述目标基站接收所述源基站发送的无线资源分配请求消息, 所述无 线资源分配请求消息用于所述目标基站在所述第一小区中为所述用户设备分 配待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资 源。  With reference to the second aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the second aspect, before the target base station receives the handover request sent by the source base station, the method further includes: Receiving, by the target base station, a radio resource allocation request message sent by the source base station, where the radio resource allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate downlink resources corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched for the user equipment in the first cell. Or the uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
结合第二方面, 第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或第二方面的第二 种可能的实现方式, 在第二方面的第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述下行传输 信息还包括以下一种或任意种组合:至少一个演进的无线接入承载 E-RAB标 识、 所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制 上下文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 下行无线资源专用 配置信息和 /或所述用户设备的小区 -无线网络临时标识 C-RNTI信息;所述上 行传输信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 E-RAB标识、 所述至少一 个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其 中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 上行无线资源专用配置信息和 /或所 述用户设备的 C-RNTI信息。 With reference to the second aspect, the first possible implementation manner of the second aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the second aspect, in the third possible implementation manner of the second aspect, the downlink transmission information is further The following one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identifier, E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; wherein, the wireless The resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI information of the user equipment; the uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB The identifier, the E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and the radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control context information includes: uplink radio resource dedicated configuration information and/or The C-RNTI information of the user equipment.
本发明的第三方面提供一种切换方法, 包括:  A third aspect of the present invention provides a handover method, including:
用户设备接收源基站发送的切换命令, 所述切换命令具有为所述用户设 备分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输 对应的上行资源配置信息;  The user equipment receives the handover command sent by the source base station, where the handover command has the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched and the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
所述用户设备根据所述下行资源配置信息进行下行资源配置, 切换后保 持与所述源基站的所述上行传输且经由目标基站进行所述下行传输; 或根据 所述上行资源配置信息进行上行资源配置, 切换后保持与所述源基站间的所 述下行传输且经由所述目标基站进行所述上行传输;  The user equipment performs the downlink resource configuration according to the downlink resource configuration information, and after the handover, the uplink transmission with the source base station is performed, and the downlink transmission is performed by using the target base station; or the uplink resource is performed according to the uplink resource configuration information. Configuring to maintain the downlink transmission with the source base station after handover and perform the uplink transmission via the target base station;
其中, 所述下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类 型指示, 或, 所述上行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换 类型指示。  The downlink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
结合第三方面, 在第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述用户设备 接收的所述切换命令中还包括指示标识; 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设 备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述待切换的下行传输的下行链路并保留与 所述源基站之间的上行链路; 或, 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所 述目标基站新建用于承载所述待切换的上行传输的上行链路并保留与所述源 基站之间的下行链路; 或, 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标 基站新建用于承载所述待切换的下行传输的下行链路或新建用于承载所述待 切换的上行传输的上行链路, 并保留与所述源基站之间的上行链路和下行链 路。  With reference to the third aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the switching command that is received by the user equipment further includes an indication identifier, where the indication identifier is used to indicate the user equipment and the target The base station newly establishes a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched and reserves an uplink with the source base station; or, the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station are newly created. And carrying the uplink of the uplink transmission to be switched and retaining a downlink with the source base station; or, the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station are newly used for a bearer Determining a downlink of the downlink transmission of the handover or newly establishing an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be handed over, and retaining an uplink and a downlink with the source base station.
结合第三方面, 或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第 二种可能的实现方式中, 还包括: 所述用户设备将所述 PDCP实体划分为上 行 PDCP实体和下行 PDCP实体, 所述上行 PDCP实体与所述源基站提供 的第二小区对应,所述下行 PDCP实体与所述目标基站提供的第一小区对应; 所述用户设备将所述 RLC实体划分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体,所述 上行 RLC实体与所述源基站提供的第二小区对应, 所述下行 RLC实体与所 述目标基站提供的第一小区对应; 其中, 所述用户设备经由所述第一小区与 所述目标基站进行所述下行传输, 并经由所述第二小区与所述源基站进行所 述上行传输。 结合第三方面的第二种可能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第三种可能的实 现方式中, 所述源基站为微基站, 所述目标基站为宏基站。 With the third aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the method further includes: the user equipment dividing the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, the uplink PDCP entity corresponding to the second cell provided by the source base station, the downlink PDCP entity corresponding to the first cell provided by the target base station; the user equipment dividing the RLC entity into an uplink An RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, where the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, where the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station; The first cell performs the downlink transmission with the target base station, and performs the uplink transmission with the source base station via the second cell. With reference to the second possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the source base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station.
结合第三方面, 或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第 四种可能的实现方式中, 还包括: 所述用户设备将所述 PDCP实体划分为上 行 PDCP实体和下行 PDCP实体, 所述上行 PDCP实体与所述目标基站提 供的第一小区对应,所述下行 PDCP实体与所述源基站提供的第二小区对应; 所述用户设备将所述 RLC实体划分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体,所述 上行 RLC实体与所述目标基站提供的第一小区对应, 所述下行 RLC实体与 所述源基站提供的第二小区对应; 其中, 所述用户设备经由所述第一小区与 所述目标基站进行所述上行传输, 并经由所述第二小区与所述源基站进行所 述下行传输。  With reference to the third aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the method further includes: the user equipment dividing the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, the uplink PDCP entity corresponding to the first cell provided by the target base station, the downlink PDCP entity corresponding to the second cell provided by the source base station; the user equipment dividing the RLC entity into an uplink An RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, where the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station; The first cell performs the uplink transmission with the target base station, and performs the downlink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
结合第三方面的第四中可能的实现方式, 在第三方面的第五种可能的实 现方式中, 所述源基站为宏基站, 所述目标基站为微基站。  With reference to the fourth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, in a fifth possible implementation manner of the third aspect, the source base station is a macro base station, and the target base station is a micro base station.
本发明的第四方面提供一种基站, 包括:  A fourth aspect of the present invention provides a base station, including:
确定单元, 用于确定将用户设备的下行传输切换至第一小区或者将用户 设备的上行传输切换至第一小区;  a determining unit, configured to determine to switch downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell or to switch uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell;
发送单元, 用于向所述第一小区对应的目标基站发送切换请求, 所述切 换请求具有所述用户设备待切换的下行传输信息或上行传输信息;  a sending unit, configured to send a handover request to the target base station corresponding to the first cell, where the switching request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
所述发送单元还用于, 向所述用户设备发送切换命令, 所述切换命令具 有为所述用户设备分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待 切换的上行传输对应的上行资源配置信息, 以便切换后所述用户设备保持与 所述基站的所述上行传输且所述用户设备经由所述目标基站进行所述下行传 输, 或切换后保持与所述基站间的所述下行传输且所述用户设备经由所述目 标基站进行所述上行传输;  The sending unit is further configured to send, to the user equipment, a handover command, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched and the uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched. Configuring information, so that the user equipment maintains the uplink transmission with the base station after handover, and the user equipment performs the downlink transmission via the target base station, or maintains the downlink transmission with the base station after handover And the user equipment performs the uplink transmission via the target base station;
其中, 所述下行传输信息和所述下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下 行传输切换的切换类型指示, 或, 所述上行传输信息和所述上行资源配置信 息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指示。  The downlink transmission information and the downlink resource configuration information include a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink transmission information and the uplink resource configuration information include an indication for performing uplink transmission handover. Switch type indication.
结合第四方面, 在第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述确定单元 具体用于: 当所述基站为微基站, 所述目标基站为宏基站时, 确定将所述用 户设备的下行传输切换至由所述宏基站提供服务的所述第一小区; 或者, 当 所述基站为宏基站, 所述目标基站为微基站时, 确定将所述用户设备的上行 传输切换至由所述微基站提供服务的所述第一小区。 With reference to the fourth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the determining unit is specifically configured to: when the base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station, determine that the user equipment is Downlink transmission is switched to the first cell served by the macro base station; or, when The base station is a macro base station, and when the target base station is a micro base station, it is determined that the uplink transmission of the user equipment is switched to the first cell served by the micro base station.
结合第四方面, 或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第四方面的第 二种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一小区与切换前向所述用户设备提供服务的 所述基站对应的小区的覆盖范围有重叠; 或, 所述基站与所述目标基站的频 率有重叠。  With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the first cell and the service that provides a service to the user equipment before the handover The coverage of the cell corresponding to the base station overlaps; or, the base station overlaps with the frequency of the target base station.
结合第四方面, 第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或第四方面的第二 种可能的实现方式, 在第四方面的第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述发送单元 还用于: 向所述目标基站发送无线资源分配请求消息, 所述分配请求消息用 于所述目标基站在所述第一小区中为所述用户设备分配待切换的下行传输对 应的下行资源或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源。  With reference to the fourth aspect, the first possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in the third possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the sending unit is further used And sending a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station, where the allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate, to the user equipment, a downlink resource corresponding to a downlink transmission to be switched or to be switched in the first cell. The uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission.
结合第四方面, 或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第四方面的第三 种可能的实现方式中的任意一种可能的实现方式, 在第四方面的第四种可能 的实现方式中, 所述发送单元还用于: 向所述用户设备发送媒体接入控制层 控制单元 MAC CE,所述 MAC CE用于指示是否允许上行传输和下行传输分 离。  With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation of the fourth aspect to any one of the possible implementations of the third possible implementation of the fourth aspect, the fourth possible implementation of the fourth aspect In the mode, the sending unit is further configured to: send, to the user equipment, a medium access control layer control unit MAC CE, where the MAC CE is used to indicate whether to allow uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation.
结合第四方面, 或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第四方面的第四 种可能的实现方式中的任意一种可能的实现方式, 在第四方面的第五种可能 的实现方式中, 所述下行传输信息还包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 演进的无线接入承载 E-RAB标识、所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB 服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文 信息包括:下行无线资源专用配置信息和 /或所述用户终端的小区 -无线网络临 时标识 C-RNTI信息; 所述上行传输信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少 一个 E-RAB标识、 所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 上行 无线资源专用配置信息和 /或所述用户终端的 C-RNTI信息。  With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation of the fourth aspect to any one of the possible implementations of the fourth possible implementation of the fourth aspect, the fifth possible implementation of the fourth aspect In the manner, the downlink transmission information further includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identifier, E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource Controlling the context information, where the radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI information of the user terminal; the uplink transmission information includes one or the following Any combination of the at least one E-RAB identifier, the E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and the radio resource control context information; wherein the radio resource control context information includes: Information and/or C-RNTI information of the user terminal.
结合第四方面, 或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第四方面的第五 种可能的实现方式中的任意一种可能的实现方式, 在第四方面的第六种可能 的实现方式中: 所述为所述用户设备分配的下行资源配置信息包括以下一种 或任意种组合: 信令无线承载 SRB下行配置信息、 数据无线承载 DRB下行 配置信息、 媒体接入控制 MAC 下行配置信息、 物理下行共享信道 PDSCH 配置信息; 所述为所述用户设备分配的上行资源配置信息包括以下一种或任 意种组合: SRB上行配置信息、 DRB上行配置信息、 MAC上行配置信息、 PUSCH配置信息。 With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation of the fourth aspect to any one of the possible implementations of the fifth possible implementation of the fourth aspect, the sixth possible implementation of the fourth aspect In the mode, the downlink resource configuration information allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: signaling radio bearer SRB downlink configuration information, data radio bearer DRB downlink The configuration information, the medium access control MAC downlink configuration information, and the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH configuration information; the uplink resource configuration information allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink configuration information, DRB uplink configuration Information, MAC uplink configuration information, PUSCH configuration information.
结合第四方面, 或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第四方面的第六 种可能的实现方式中的任意一种可能的实现方式, 在第四方面的第七种可能 的实现方式中, 所述切换命令中还包括指示标识; 所述指示标识用于指示所 述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载待切换的下行传输的下行链路并保 留与所述基站之间的上行链路; 或, 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与 所述目标基站新建用于承载所述待切换的上行传输的上行链路并保留与所述 基站之间的下行链路; 或, 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标 基站新建用于承载所述待切换的下行传输的下行链路或新建用于承载所述待 切换的上行传输的上行链路, 并保留与所述基站之间的上行链路和下行链路 本发明的第五方面提供一种基站, 包括:  With reference to the fourth aspect, or the first possible implementation of the fourth aspect to any one of the possible implementations of the sixth possible implementation of the fourth aspect, the seventh possible implementation of the fourth aspect In the mode, the handover command further includes an indication identifier, where the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying downlink transmissions to be handed over and reserve with the base station. Uplink; or, the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched and reserve a downlink with the base station Or the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched or newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched. And retaining the uplink and downlink with the base station. A fifth aspect of the present invention provides a base station, including:
接收单元, 用于接收源基站发送的切换请求消息, 所述切换请求具有用 户设备待切换的下行传输信息或上行传输信息;  a receiving unit, configured to receive a handover request message sent by the source base station, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
确定单元, 用于确定允许所述用户设备的下行传输或上行传输切换至所 述基站提供的第一小区;  a determining unit, configured to determine that the downlink transmission or the uplink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the first cell provided by the base station;
发送单元, 用于向所述源基站发送为所述用户设备分配的待切换的下行 传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源配置信 息, 以便切换后所述用户设备保持与所述源基站的所述上行传输且所述用户 设备在切换后经由所述基站进行所述下行传输, 或以便切换后所述用户设备 保持与所述源基站间的所述下行传输且所述用户设备在切换后经由所述基站 进行所述上行传输;  a sending unit, configured to send, to the source base station, downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so that the user equipment remains after the handover The downlink transmission with the source base station and the user equipment performs the downlink transmission via the base station after handover, or the user equipment maintains the downlink transmission with the source base station after handover Said user equipment performs said uplink transmission via said base station after handover;
其中, 所述下行传输信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类型指 示, 或者, 所述上行传输信息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指 示。  The downlink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
结合第五方面, 在第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述确定单元, 具体用于: 当所述源基站为微基站, 所述基站为宏基站时, 确定允许所述用 户设备的下行传输切换至所述基站提供的第一小区; 或, 当所述源基站为宏 基站, 所述基站为微基站时, 确定允许所述用户设备的上行传输切换至所述 基站提供的第一小区。 With reference to the fifth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the determining unit is specifically configured to: when the source base station is a micro base station, and the base station is a macro base station, determining to allow the user Downlink transmission of the device is switched to the first cell provided by the base station; or, when the source base station is a macro And determining, by the base station, that the base station is a micro base station, and determining that the uplink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the first cell provided by the base station.
结合第五方面, 或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第五方面的第 二种可能的实现方式中, 所述接收单元, 还用于接收所述源基站发送的无线 资源分配请求消息, 所述无线资源分配请求消息用于所述基站在所述第一小 区中为所述用户设备分配待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源或者待切换的上 行传输对应的上行资源。  With reference to the fifth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in the second possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the receiving unit is further configured to receive the radio resource allocation sent by the source base station a request message, the radio resource allocation request message is used by the base station in the first cell to allocate, to the user equipment, a downlink resource corresponding to a downlink transmission to be switched or an uplink resource corresponding to an uplink transmission to be switched.
结合第五方面, 第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或第五方面的第二 种可能的实现方式, 在第五方面的第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述下行传输 信息还包括以下一种或任意种组合:至少一个演进的无线接入承载 E-RAB标 识、 所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制 上下文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 下行无线资源专用 配置信息和 /或所述用户设备的小区 -无线网络临时标识 C-RNTI信息;所述上 行传输信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 E-RAB标识、 所述至少一 个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其 中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 上行无线资源专用配置信息和 /或所 述用户设备的 C-RNTI信息。  With the fifth aspect, the first possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, in the third possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the downlink transmission information is further The following one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identifier, E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; wherein, the wireless The resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI information of the user equipment; the uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB The identifier, the E-RAB service quality parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and the radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control context information includes: uplink radio resource specific configuration information and/or the user equipment C-RNTI information.
本发明的第六方面提供一种用户设备, 包括:  A sixth aspect of the present invention provides a user equipment, including:
接收单元, 用于接收源基站发送的切换命令, 所述切换命令具有为所述 用户设备分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上 行传输对应的上行资源配置信息;  a receiving unit, configured to receive a handover command sent by the source base station, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched;
配置单元, 用于根据所述下行资源配置信息进行下行资源配置, 切换后 保持与所述源基站的所述上行传输且在切换后经由目标基站进行所述下行传 输; 或根据所述上行资源配置信息进行上行资源配置, 切换后保持与所述源 基站间的所述下行传输且所述用户设备在切换后经由所述目标基站进行所述 上行传输;  a configuration unit, configured to perform downlink resource configuration according to the downlink resource configuration information, maintain the uplink transmission with the source base station after the handover, and perform the downlink transmission by using the target base station after the handover; or configure according to the uplink resource The information is configured to perform uplink resource allocation, and after the handover, the downlink transmission with the source base station is maintained, and the user equipment performs the uplink transmission by using the target base station after handover;
其中, 所述下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类 型指示, 或, 所述上行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换 类型指示。  The downlink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
结合第六方面, 在第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述切换命令 中还包括指示标识; 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新 建用于承载所述待切换的下行传输的下行链路并保留与所述源基站之间的上 行链路; 或, 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于 承载所述待切换的上行传输的上行链路并保留与所述源基站之间的下行链 路; 或, 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载 所述待切换的下行传输的下行链路或新建用于承载所述待切换的上行传输的 上行链路, 并保留与所述源基站之间的上行链路和下行链路。 With reference to the sixth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the switching command The indication identifier is further used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched and reserve an uplink with the source base station. Or the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched and reserve a downlink with the source base station; or The indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched or newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched, and keep An uplink and a downlink between the source base station and the source base station.
结合第六方面, 或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第六方面的第 二种可能的实现方式中, 还包括划分单元, 用于: 将所述 PDCP实体划分为 上行 PDCP实体和下行 PDCP实体, 所述上行 PDCP实体与所述源基站提 供的第二小区对应, 所述下行 PDCP实体与所述目标基站提供的第一小区对 应;将所述 RLC实体划分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体,所述上行 RLC 实体与所述源基站提供的第二小区对应,所述下行 RLC实体与所述目标基站 提供的第一小区对应; 其中, 所述用户设备经由所述第一小区与所述目标基 站进行所述下行传输,并经由所述第二小区与所述源基站进行所述上行传输。  With reference to the sixth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the second possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, further includes: a dividing unit, configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity And a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station; and the RLC entity is divided into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, the uplink RLC entity corresponding to the second cell provided by the source base station, the downlink RLC entity corresponding to the first cell provided by the target base station, where the user equipment is connected to the first cell Performing the downlink transmission with the target base station, and performing the uplink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
结合第六方面的第二种可能的实现方式, 在第六方面的第三种可能的实 现方式中, 所述源基站为微基站, 所述目标基站为宏基站。  With reference to the second possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the source base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station.
结合第六方面, 或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第六方面的第 四种可能的实现方式中, 还包括划分单元, 用于: 将所述 PDCP实体划分为 上行 PDCP实体和下行 PDCP实体, 所述上行 PDCP实体与所述目标基站 提供的第一小区对应, 所述下行 PDCP实体与所述源基站提供的第二小区对 应;将所述 RLC实体划分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体,所述上行 RLC 实体与所述目标基站提供的第一小区对应,所述下行 RLC实体与所述源基站 提供的第二小区对应; 其中, 所述用户设备经由所述第一小区与所述目标基 站进行所述上行传输,并经由所述第二小区与所述源基站进行所述下行传输。  With reference to the sixth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the fourth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, further includes: a dividing unit, configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity And a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the RLC entity is divided into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, the uplink RLC entity corresponding to the first cell provided by the target base station, the downlink RLC entity corresponding to the second cell provided by the source base station, where the user equipment is connected to the first cell Performing the uplink transmission with the target base station, and performing the downlink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
结合第六方面的第四中可能的实现方式, 在第六方面的第五种可能的实 现方式中, 所述源基站为宏基站, 所述目标基站为微基站。  With reference to the fourth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, in a fifth possible implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the source base station is a macro base station, and the target base station is a micro base station.
本发明的第七方面提供一种基站, 包括:  A seventh aspect of the present invention provides a base station, including:
处理器, 用于确定将用户设备的下行传输切换至第一小区或者将用户设 备的上行传输切换至第一小区; 发射机, 用于向所述第一小区对应的目标基站发送切换请求, 所述切换 请求具有所述用户设备待切换的下行传输信息或上行传输信息; a processor, configured to determine to switch downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell or to switch uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell; a transmitter, configured to send a handover request to a target base station corresponding to the first cell, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
所述发射机还用于, 向所述用户设备发送切换命令, 所述切换命令具有 为所述用户设备分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切 换的上行传输对应的上行资源配置信息, 以便切换后所述用户设备保持与所 述基站的所述上行传输且所述用户设备在切换后经由所述目标基站进行所述 下行传输, 或切换后保持与所述基站间的所述下行传输且所述用户设备在切 换后经由所述目标基站进行所述上行传输;  The transmitter is further configured to send, to the user equipment, a handover command, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the user equipment, or an uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched. Configuring information such that the user equipment maintains the uplink transmission with the base station after handover, and the user equipment performs the downlink transmission via the target base station after handover, or maintains a location with the base station after handover Determining downlink transmission, and the user equipment performs the uplink transmission via the target base station after handover;
其中, 所述下行传输信息和所述下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下 行传输切换的切换类型指示, 或, 所述上行传输信息和所述上行资源配置信 息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指示。  The downlink transmission information and the downlink resource configuration information include a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink transmission information and the uplink resource configuration information include an indication for performing uplink transmission handover. Switch type indication.
结合第七方面, 在第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述处理器具 体用于: 当所述基站为微基站, 所述目标基站为宏基站时, 确定将所述用户 设备的下行传输切换至由所述宏基站提供服务的所述第一小区; 或者, 当所 述基站为宏基站, 所述目标基站为微基站时, 确定将所述用户设备的上行传 输切换至由所述微基站提供服务的所述第一小区。  With reference to the seventh aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, the processor is specifically configured to: when the base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station, determine that the user equipment is The downlink transmission is switched to the first cell served by the macro base station; or, when the base station is a macro base station, and the target base station is a micro base station, determining to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment to The micro base station provides the first cell of the service.
结合第七方面, 或第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第七方面的第 二种可能的实现方式中, 所述第一小区与切换前向所述用户设备提供服务的 所述源基站对应的小区的覆盖范围有重叠; 或, 所述目标基站与所述源基站 的频率有重叠。  With reference to the seventh aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, in the second possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, the first cell and the service that provides a service to the user equipment before switching The coverage of the cell corresponding to the source base station overlaps; or, the frequency of the target base station overlaps with the frequency of the source base station.
结合第七方面, 第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或第七方面的第二 种可能的实现方式, 在第七方面的第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述发射机还 用于: 向所述目标基站发送无线资源分配请求消息, 所述分配请求消息用于 所述目标基站在所述第一小区中为所述用户设备分配待切换的下行传输对应 的下行资源或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源。  With reference to the seventh aspect, the first possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, And sending a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station, where the allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate, to the user equipment, a downlink resource corresponding to a downlink transmission to be switched or to be switched in the first cell. The uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission.
结合第七方面、 或第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七方面的第三 种可能的实现方式中的任意一种可能的实现方式, 在第七方面的第四种可能 的实现方式中, 所述发射机还用于: 向所述用户设备发送媒体接入控制层控 制单元 MAC CE,所述 MAC CE用于指示是否允许上行传输和下行传输分离。  With reference to the seventh aspect, or the first possible implementation of the seventh aspect to any one of the possible implementations of the third possible implementation of the seventh aspect, the fourth possible implementation of the seventh aspect In the mode, the transmitter is further configured to: send, to the user equipment, a medium access control layer control unit MAC CE, where the MAC CE is used to indicate whether to allow uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation.
结合第七方面、 或第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七方面的第四 种可能的实现方式中的任意一种可能的实现方式, 在第七方面的第五种可能 的实现方式中, 所述下行传输信息还包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 演进的无线接入承载 E-RAB标识、所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB 服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文 信息包括:下行无线资源专用配置信息和 /或所述用户终端的小区 -无线网络临 时标识 C-RNTI信息; 所述上行传输信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少 一个 E-RAB标识、 所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 上行 无线资源专用配置信息和 /或所述用户终端的 C-RNTI信息。 Combining the seventh aspect, or the first possible implementation of the seventh aspect to the fourth aspect of the seventh aspect In a fifth possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, the downlink transmission information further includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved wireless connection The E-RAB service quality parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier and the radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or The cell-radio network temporarily identifies the C-RNTI information of the user terminal; the uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, and the E-RAB corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier The QoS parameter, the radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control context information includes: uplink radio resource specific configuration information and/or C-RNTI information of the user terminal.
结合第七方面、 或第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七方面的第五 种可能的实现方式中的任意一种可能的实现方式, 在第七方面的第六种可能 的实现方式中, 所述为所述用户设备分配的下行资源配置信息包括以下一种 或任意种组合: 信令无线承载 SRB下行配置信息、 数据无线承载 DRB下行 配置信息、 媒体接入控制 MAC 下行配置信息、 物理下行共享信道 PDSCH 配置信息; 所述为所述用户设备分配的上行资源配置信息包括以下一种或任 意种组合: SRB上行配置信息、 DRB上行配置信息、 MAC上行配置信息、 PUSCH配置信息。  With reference to the seventh aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, to any one of the possible implementation manners of the fifth possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, the sixth possible implementation in the seventh aspect In the mode, the downlink resource configuration information that is allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: signaling radio bearer SRB downlink configuration information, data radio bearer DRB downlink configuration information, and media access control MAC downlink configuration information. The physical downlink shared channel PDSCH configuration information; the uplink resource configuration information allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink configuration information, DRB uplink configuration information, MAC uplink configuration information, and PUSCH configuration information.
结合第七方面、 或第七方面的第一种可能的实现方式至第七方面的第六 种可能的实现方式中的任意一种可能的实现方式, 在第七方面的第七种可能 的实现方式中, 所述切换命令中还包括指示标识; 所述指示标识用于指示所 述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载待切换的下行传输的下行链路并保 留与所述基站之间的上行链路; 或, 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与 所述目标基站新建用于承载所述待切换的上行传输的上行链路并保留与所述 基站之间的下行链路; 或, 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标 基站新建用于承载所述待切换的下行传输的下行链路或新建用于承载所述待 切换的上行传输的上行链路,并保留与所述基站之间的上行链路和下行链路。  With reference to the seventh aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, to any one of the possible implementation manners of the sixth possible implementation manner of the seventh aspect, the seventh possible implementation of the seventh aspect In the mode, the handover command further includes an indication identifier, where the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying downlink transmissions to be handed over and reserve with the base station. Uplink; or, the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched and reserve a downlink with the base station Or the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched or newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched. And retaining the uplink and downlink with the base station.
本发明的第八方面提供一种基站, 包括:  An eighth aspect of the present invention provides a base station, including:
接收机, 用于接收源基站发送的切换请求消息, 所述切换请求具有用户 设备待切换的下行传输信息或上行传输信息;  a receiver, configured to receive a handover request message sent by the source base station, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
处理器, 用于确定允许所述用户设备的下行传输或上行传输切换至所述 基站提供的第一小区; a processor, configured to determine that the downlink transmission or the uplink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the a first cell provided by the base station;
发射机, 用于向所述源基站发送为所述用户设备分配的待切换的下行传 输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源配置信 息, 以便切换后所述用户设备保持与所述源基站的所述上行传输且所述用户 设备在切换后经由所述基站进行所述下行传输, 或以便切换后所述用户设备 保持与所述源基站间的所述下行传输且所述用户设备在切换后经由所述基站 进行所述上行传输;  a transmitter, configured to send, to the source base station, downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so that the user equipment remains after the handover The downlink transmission with the source base station and the user equipment performs the downlink transmission via the base station after handover, or the user equipment maintains the downlink transmission with the source base station after handover Said user equipment performs said uplink transmission via said base station after handover;
其中 , 所述下行传输信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类型指 示, 或者, 所述上行传输信息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指 示。  The downlink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
结合第八方面, 在第八方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述处理器, 具体用于: 当所述源基站为微基站, 所述基站为宏基站时, 确定允许所述用 户设备的下行传输切换至所述基站提供的第一小区; 或, 当所述源基站为宏 基站, 所述基站为微基站时, 确定允许所述用户设备的上行传输切换至所述 基站提供的第一小区。  With reference to the eighth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the eighth aspect, the processor is specifically configured to: when the source base station is a micro base station, where the base station is a macro base station, determining to allow the user The downlink transmission of the device is switched to the first cell provided by the base station; or when the source base station is a macro base station, and the base station is a micro base station, determining that the uplink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the base station First cell.
结合第八方面, 或第八方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第八方面的第 二种可能的实现方式中, 接收所述源基站发送的无线资源分配请求消息, 所 述无线资源分配请求消息用于所述基站在所述第一小区中为所述用户设备分 配待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资 源。  With reference to the eighth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the eighth aspect, in a second possible implementation manner of the eighth aspect, the receiving, by the source base station, a radio resource allocation request message, the radio resource allocation The request message is used by the base station in the first cell to allocate the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or the uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
结合第八方面, 第八方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 或第八方面的第二 种可能的实现方式, 在第八方面的第三种可能的实现方式中, 所述下行传输 信息还包括以下一种或任意种组合:至少一个演进的无线接入承载 E-RAB标 识、 所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制 上下文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 下行无线资源专用 配置信息和 /或所述用户设备的小区 -无线网络临时标识 C-RNTI信息;所述上 行传输信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 E-RAB标识、 所述至少一 个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其 中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 上行无线资源专用配置信息和 /或所 述用户设备的 C-RNTI信息。 本发明的第九方面提供一种用户设备, 包括: With reference to the eighth aspect, the first possible implementation manner of the eighth aspect, or the second possible implementation manner of the eighth aspect, in the third possible implementation manner of the eighth aspect, the downlink transmission information is further The following one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identifier, E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; wherein, the wireless The resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI information of the user equipment; the uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB The identifier, the E-RAB service quality parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and the radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control context information includes: uplink radio resource specific configuration information and/or the user equipment C-RNTI information. A ninth aspect of the present invention provides a user equipment, including:
接收机, 用于接收源基站发送的切换命令, 所述切换命令具有为所述用 户设备分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行 传输对应的上行资源配置信息;  a receiver, configured to receive a handover command sent by the source base station, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched;
处理器, 用于根据所述下行资源配置信息进行下行资源配置, 切换后保 持与所述源基站的所述上行传输且在切换后经由目标基站进行所述下行传 输; 或根据所述上行资源配置信息进行上行资源配置, 切换后保持与所述源 基站间的所述下行传输且所述用户设备在切换后经由所述目标基站进行所述 上行传输;  The processor is configured to perform downlink resource configuration according to the downlink resource configuration information, and maintain the uplink transmission with the source base station after the handover, and perform the downlink transmission by using the target base station after the handover; or configure according to the uplink resource The information is configured to perform uplink resource allocation, and after the handover, the downlink transmission with the source base station is maintained, and the user equipment performs the uplink transmission by using the target base station after handover;
其中, 所述下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类 型指示, 或, 所述上行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换 类型指示。  The downlink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
结合第六方面, 在第九方面的第一种可能的实现方式中, 所述切换命令 中还包括指示标识; 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新 建用于承载所述待切换的下行传输的下行链路并保留与所述源基站之间的上 行链路; 或, 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于 承载所述待切换的上行传输的上行链路并保留与所述源基站之间的下行链 路; 或, 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载 所述待切换的下行传输的下行链路或新建用于承载所述待切换的上行传输的 上行链路, 并保留与所述源基站之间的上行链路和下行链路。  With reference to the sixth aspect, in a first possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, the handover command further includes an indication identifier, where the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station are newly used for a bearer Determining a downlink of the downlink transmission of the handover and retaining an uplink with the source base station; or, the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station are newly used to carry the to-be-switched Uplink of the uplink transmission and retaining a downlink with the source base station; or, the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly create a downlink transmission for carrying the to-be-switched The downlink or new uplink used to carry the uplink transmission to be handed over, and the uplink and downlink with the source base station are reserved.
结合第九方面, 或第九方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第九方面的第 二种可能的实现方式中, 所述处理器还用于: 将所述 PDCP实体划分为上行 PDCP实体和下行 PDCP实体,所述上行 PDCP实体与所述源基站提供的第 二小区对应, 所述下行 PDCP实体与所述目标基站提供的第一小区对应; 将 所述 RLC实体划分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体, 所述上行 RLC实体 与所述源基站提供的第二小区对应,所述下行 RLC实体与所述目标基站提供 的第一小区对应; 其中, 所述用户设备经由所述第一小区与所述目标基站进 行所述下行传输, 并经由所述第二小区与所述源基站进行所述上行传输。  With reference to the ninth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, in the second possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, the processor is further configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity And a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station; and the RLC entity is divided into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, the uplink RLC entity corresponding to the second cell provided by the source base station, the downlink RLC entity corresponding to the first cell provided by the target base station, where the user equipment is connected to the first cell Performing the downlink transmission with the target base station, and performing the uplink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
结合第九方面的第二种可能的实现方式, 在第九方面的第三种可能的实 现方式中, 所述源基站为微基站, 所述目标基站为宏基站。 结合第九方面, 或第九方面的第一种可能的实现方式, 在第九方面的第 四种可能的实现方式中, 所述处理器还用于: 将所述 PDCP实体划分为上行 PDCP实体和下行 PDCP实体,所述上行 PDCP实体与所述目标基站提供的 第一小区对应, 所述下行 PDCP实体与所述源基站提供的第二小区对应; 将 所述 RLC实体划分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体, 所述上行 RLC实体 与所述目标基站提供的第一小区对应,所述下行 RLC实体与所述源基站提供 的第二小区对应; 其中, 所述用户设备经由所述第一小区与所述目标基站进 行所述上行传输, 并经由所述第二小区与所述源基站进行所述下行传输。 With reference to the second possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, in a third possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, the source base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station. With reference to the ninth aspect, or the first possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, in a fourth possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, the processor is further configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity And a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station; and the RLC entity is divided into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, the uplink RLC entity corresponding to the first cell provided by the target base station, the downlink RLC entity corresponding to the second cell provided by the source base station, where the user equipment is connected to the first cell Performing the uplink transmission with the target base station, and performing the downlink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
结合第九方面的第四种可能的实现方式, 在第九方面的第五种可能的实 现方式中, 所述源基站为宏基站, 所述目标基站为微基站。  With reference to the fourth possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, in a fifth possible implementation manner of the ninth aspect, the source base station is a macro base station, and the target base station is a micro base station.
本发明提供的切换方法和设备, 源基站将用户设备的上行传输或下行传 输切换至目标基站, 使用户设备的上行传输和下行传输中的一个由源基站提 供的小区服务, 另一个由目标基站提供的小区服务, 从而提高小区吞吐量和 频谱效率。 附图说明 为了更清楚地说明本发明实施例或现有技术中的技术方案, 下面将对实 施例或现有技术描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍, 显而易见地, 下面 描述中的附图仅仅是本发明的一些实施例, 对于本领域普通技术人员来讲, 在不付出创造性劳动的前提下, 还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。  The handover method and device provided by the present invention, the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station, so that one of the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the user equipment is served by the source base station, and the other is the target base station. Cell services are provided to increase cell throughput and spectrum efficiency. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS In order to more clearly illustrate the embodiments of the present invention or the technical solutions in the prior art, the drawings to be used in the embodiments or the description of the prior art will be briefly described below, and obviously, in the following description The drawings are only some of the embodiments of the present invention, and those skilled in the art can obtain other drawings based on these drawings without any creative work.
图 1为本发明提供的切换方法一个实施例的流程图;  1 is a flowchart of an embodiment of a handover method provided by the present invention;
图 2为本发明提供的切换方法又一个实施例的流程图;  2 is a flowchart of still another embodiment of a handover method provided by the present invention;
图 3为本发明提供的切换方法另一个实施例的流程图;  3 is a flowchart of another embodiment of a handover method provided by the present invention;
图 4为本发明提供的切换方法另一个实施例的流程图;  4 is a flowchart of another embodiment of a handover method provided by the present invention;
图 5为本发明实例提供的 PDCP实体和 RLC AM实体的示意图; 图 6为图 4所示实施例中用户设备与源基站和目标基站一个通信场景的 示意图;  5 is a schematic diagram of a PDCP entity and an RLC AM entity provided by an example of the present invention; FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a communication scenario between a user equipment, a source base station, and a target base station in the embodiment shown in FIG.
图 7为图 4所示实施例中用户设备与源基站和目标基站另一个通信场景 的示意图;  7 is a schematic diagram of another communication scenario between a user equipment and a source base station and a target base station in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4;
图 8本发明实施例所适用的一种异构网场景示意图; 图 9为本发明提供的切换方法另一个实施例的流程图; FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a heterogeneous network scenario applied to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of another embodiment of a handover method provided by the present invention; FIG.
图 10为图 9所示实施例中用户设备与源基站和目标基站一个通信场景的 示意图;  10 is a schematic diagram of a communication scenario between a user equipment, a source base station, and a target base station in the embodiment shown in FIG.
图 11为图 9所示实施例中用户设备与源基站和目标基站另一个通信场景 的示意图;  11 is a schematic diagram of another communication scenario between a user equipment and a source base station and a target base station in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9;
图 12为本发明提供的切换方法一种网络架构示意图;  12 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture of a handover method provided by the present invention;
图 13为本发明提供的切换方法又一种网络架构示意图;  FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of another network architecture of the handover method provided by the present invention; FIG.
图 14为本发明提供的基站一个实施例的结构示意图;  FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a base station according to the present invention; FIG.
图 15为本发明提供的基站又一个实施例的结构示意图;  15 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a base station according to the present invention;
图 16为本发明提供的用户设备一个实施例的结构示意图;  16 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a user equipment provided by the present invention;
图 17为本发明提供的基站又一个实施例的结构示意图;  17 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a base station according to the present invention;
图 18为本发明提供的基站又一个实施例的结构示意图;  18 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a base station according to the present invention;
图 19为本发明提供的用户设备又一个实施例的结构示意图;  FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a user equipment according to the present invention;
图 20为本发明提供的通讯系统一个实施例的结构示意图。 具体实施方式 下面将结合本发明实施例中的附图, 对本发明实施例中的技术方案进行 清楚、 完整地描述, 显然, 所描述的实施例仅仅是本发明一部分实施例, 而 不是全部的实施例。 基于本发明中的实施例, 本领域普通技术人员在没有做 出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例, 都属于本发明保护的范围。  FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a communication system provided by the present invention. The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention are clearly and completely described in the following with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present invention. It is obvious that the described embodiments are only a part of the embodiments of the present invention, and not all of the embodiments. example. All other embodiments obtained by those skilled in the art based on the embodiments of the present invention without creative efforts are within the scope of the present invention.
本文中描述的技术可用于各种通信系统, 例如当前 2G, 3G通信系统和 下一代通信系统, 例如全球移动通信系统(GSM, Global System for Mobile communications ), 码分多址 ( CDMA, Code Division Multiple Access ) 系 统, 时分多址(TDMA, Time Division Multiple Access ) 系统, 宽带码分多 址( WCDMA, Wideband Code Division Multiple Access Wireless ), 频分多 址( FDMA, Frequency Division Multiple Addressing ) 系统, 正交频分多址 ( OFDMA, Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiple Access )系统, 单载波 FDMA( SC-FDMA )系统,通用分组无线业务( GPRS, General Packet Radio Service ) 系统, 长期演进(LTE, Long Term Evolution ) 系统, 以及其他此 类通信系统。 本申请中涉及的用户设备, 可以是无线终端也可以是有线终端, 无线终 端可以是指向用户提供语音和 /或数据连通性的设备, 具有无线连接功能的手 持式设备、 或连接到无线调制解调器的其他处理设备。 无线终端可以经无线 接入网 (例如, RAN , Radio Access Network ) 与一个或多个核心网进行通 信, 无线终端可以是移动终端, 如移动电话(或称为"蜂窝"电话)和具有移动 终端的计算机, 例如, 可以是便携式、 袖珍式、 手持式、 计算机内置的或者 车载的移动装置, 它们与无线接入网交换语言和 /或数据。 例如, 个人通信业 务 ( PCS, Personal Communication Service ) 电话、 无绳电话、 会话发起 协议(SIP )话机、 无线本地环路(WLL, Wireless Local Loop )站、 个人数 字助理(PDA, Personal Digital Assistant )等设备。 无线终端也可以称为系 统、订户单元( Subscriber Unit )、订户站( Subscriber Station ),移动站( Mobile Station )、移动台( Mobile )、远程站( Remote Station )、接入点( Access Point )、 远程终端( Remote Terminal )、接入终端( Access Terminal )、用户终端( User Terminal ), 用户代理( User Agent )、 用户设备( User Device )、 或用户装备 ( User Equipment s The techniques described herein can be used in a variety of communication systems, such as current 2G, 3G communication systems and next generation communication systems, such as Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA, Code Division Multiple). Access system, Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) system, Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA), Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA), Frequency Division Multiple Addressing (OFDM) system, Orthogonal Frequency OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiple Access) system, single carrier FDMA (SC-FDMA) system, General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) system, Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, And other such communication systems. The user equipment involved in the present application may be a wireless terminal or a wired terminal, and the wireless terminal may be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to the user, a handheld device with wireless connectivity, or a wireless modem. Other processing equipment. The wireless terminal can communicate with one or more core networks via a radio access network (eg, RAN, Radio Access Network), which can be a mobile terminal, such as a mobile phone (or "cellular" phone) and with a mobile terminal The computers, for example, can be portable, pocket-sized, handheld, computer-integrated or in-vehicle mobile devices that exchange language and/or data with the wireless access network. For example, Personal Communication Service (PCS), Cordless Phone, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), etc. . A wireless terminal may also be called a system, a Subscriber Unit, a Subscriber Station, a Mobile Station, a Mobile, a Remote Station, an Access Point, Remote Terminal, Access Terminal, User Terminal, User Agent, User Device, or User Equipment s
本申请中涉及的基站(例如, 接入点), 可以是指接入网中在空中接口上 通过一个或多个扇区与无线终端通信的设备。 基站可用于将收到的空中帧与 IP分组进行相互转换, 作为无线终端与接入网的其余部分之间的路由器, 其 中接入网的其余部分可包括网际协议(IP ) 网络。 基站还可协调对空中接口 的属性管理。 例如, 基站可以是 GSM 或 CDMA 中的基站 (BTS , Base Transceiver Station ),也可以是 WCDMA中的基站( NodeB ),还可以是 LTE 中的演进型基站( NodeB或 eNB或 e-NodeB, evolutional Node B ), 本申 请并不限定。  A base station (e.g., an access point) referred to in this application may refer to a device in an access network that communicates with a wireless terminal over one or more sectors over an air interface. The base station can be used to convert the received air frame to the IP packet as a router between the wireless terminal and the rest of the access network, wherein the remainder of the access network can include an Internet Protocol (IP) network. The base station can also coordinate attribute management of the air interface. For example, the base station may be a base station (BTS, Base Transceiver Station) in GSM or CDMA, or may be a base station (NodeB) in WCDMA, or may be an evolved base station in LTE (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B), this application is not limited.
另外, 本文中术语"系统"和"网络"在本文中常被可互换使用。 本文中术语 "和 /或", 仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系, 表示可以存在三种关系, 例 如, A和 /或 B, 可以表示: 单独存在 A, 同时存在 A和 B, 单独存在 B这三 种情况。 另外, 本文中字符 "/" , 一般表示前后关联对象是一种 "或" 的关 系。  Additionally, the terms "system" and "network" are used interchangeably herein. The term "and/or" in this context is merely an association that describes the associated object, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and / or B, which can mean: A exists separately, and both A and B exist, exist alone B these three situations. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the contextual object is an "or" relationship.
本发明各实施例中, 涉及到的切换操作, 其实质是将用户设备的上行传 输和下行传输分离的操作。 因此, 相应的, 其中涉及的切换请求、 切换响应、 切换命令等消息, 分别可以是用于请求、 响应和命令执行上行传输和下行传 输分离操作的消息。 In various embodiments of the present invention, the handover operation involved is essentially an operation of separating the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the user equipment. Therefore, correspondingly, the handover request, handover response, Messages such as handover commands may be messages for requesting, responding, and commanding to perform uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation operations, respectively.
图 1 为本发明提供的切换方法一个实施例的流程图, 该方法可以由源基 站执行, 如图 1 , 该方法包括:  FIG. 1 is a flowchart of an embodiment of a handover method provided by the present invention, which may be performed by a source base station, as shown in FIG. 1, the method includes:
S101、 源基站确定将用户设备的下行传输切换至第一小区或者将用户设 备的上行传输切换至第一小区。  S101. The source base station determines to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell or switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell.
5102、 源基站向第一小区对应的目标基站发送切换请求, 切换请求中具 有用户设备待切换的下行传输信息或上行传输信息。  The source base station sends a handover request to the target base station corresponding to the first cell, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment.
5103、 源基站向用户设备发送切换命令, 切换命令中具有为用户设备分 配待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输对应的 上行资源配置信息, 以便切换后用户设备保持与源基站的上行传输且经由目 标基站进行下行传输, 或切换后用户设备保持与源基站的下行传输且经由目 标基站进行上行传输。  The source base station sends a handover command to the user equipment, where the handover command has the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so that the user equipment remains after the handover. The uplink transmission of the source base station is performed by the target base station, or after the handover, the user equipment maintains downlink transmission with the source base station and performs uplink transmission via the target base station.
其中, 下行传输信息和下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切 换的切换类型指示, 或, 上行传输信息和上行资源配置信息包括用于指示进 行上行传输切换的切换类型指示。  The downlink transmission information and the downlink resource configuration information include a handover type indication for indicating downlink transmission switching, or the uplink transmission information and the uplink resource configuration information include a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
在本实施例中, 源基站将用户设备的上行传输或下行传输切换至目标基 站, 从而使用户设备在切换后的上行传输和下行传输中的一个由源基站提供 的小区服务, 另一个由目标基站提供的小区服务, 实现用户设备的上行传输 和下行传输分离, 降低基站对用户设备造成的干扰, 从而提高小区吞吐量和 频谱效率。  In this embodiment, the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station, so that the user equipment serves the cell service provided by the source base station in the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission after the handover, and the other target The cell service provided by the base station implements uplink and downlink transmission separation of the user equipment, reduces interference caused by the base station to the user equipment, and improves cell throughput and spectrum efficiency.
可选的, 目标基站提供的第一小区与切换前向用户设备提供服务的源基 站对应的小区的覆盖范围有重叠; 或, 目标基站与源基站的频率有重叠。 当 覆盖范围或频率有重叠, 且当用户设备单独与一个基站进行上下行通讯时, 会受到另一个基站的干扰。 通过上下行传输分离, 即用户设备与一个基站保 持上行传输, 与另一个基站保持下行传输, 可以在保证用户感受的前提下, 有效降低基站对其传输的干扰。  Optionally, the first cell provided by the target base station overlaps with the coverage of the cell corresponding to the source base station that provides service to the user equipment before the handover; or, the frequency of the target base station overlaps with the source base station. When the coverage or frequency overlaps, and when the user equipment communicates with one base station separately, it will be interfered by another base station. The uplink and downlink transmissions are separated, that is, the user equipment and the one base station maintain the uplink transmission, and the other base station maintains the downlink transmission, which can effectively reduce the interference of the base station to the transmission under the premise of ensuring the user experience.
在一种实施场景下, 源基站可以为微基站, 微基站可以指低功率网络节 点 ( low power node, LPN ), 或者小型基站, 或者远端射频头 ( remote radio head , RRH )等。用户设备当前的服务小区为微基站提供的微小区( pico cell ), 用户设备与微小区进行上行通信和下行通信。 在该实施场景下, 源基站可以 确定将用户设备的下行传输从微小区切换到宏基站提供的宏小区 ( macro cell ), 即, 切换的目标基站可以为宏基站, 切换的目标小区为宏基站提供的 第一小区, 而用户设备保持与微小区的上行传输。 In an implementation scenario, the source base station may be a micro base station, and the micro base station may be a low power node (LPN), or a small base station, or a remote radio head (RRH). The current serving cell of the user equipment is a pico cell provided by the micro base station, The user equipment performs uplink communication and downlink communication with the micro cell. In this implementation scenario, the source base station may determine to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment from the micro cell to the macro cell provided by the macro base station, that is, the target base station to be switched may be a macro base station, and the target cell to be switched is a macro base station. The first cell is provided, and the user equipment maintains uplink transmission with the micro cell.
可选的, 在源基站为微基站且目标基站为宏基站的实施场景下, 宏基站 提供的第一小区可以覆盖切换前向用户设备提供服务的源基站对应的小区, 或宏基站与微基站提供的频率可以有重叠。  Optionally, in a scenario where the source base station is a micro base station and the target base station is a macro base station, the first cell provided by the macro base station may cover a cell corresponding to the source base station that provides the service to the user equipment before the handover, or the macro base station and the micro base station The frequencies provided can be overlapped.
在另一种实施场景下, 源基站还可以为宏基站, 用户设备当前的服务小 区为宏基站提供的宏小区, 用户设备与宏小区进行上行通信和下行通信。 在 该实施场景下, 源基站可以确定将用户设备的上行传输从宏小区切换到微基 站 ( micro base station )提供的微小区 ( pico cell ), 即, 切换的目标基站可 以为微基站, 切换的目标小区为微基站提供的第一小区, 而用户设备保持与 宏小区的下行传输。  In another implementation scenario, the source base station may also be a macro base station, where the current service cell of the user equipment is a macro cell provided by the macro base station, and the user equipment performs uplink communication and downlink communication with the macro cell. In this implementation scenario, the source base station may determine to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment from the macro cell to the pico cell provided by the micro base station, that is, the target base station to be switched may be a micro base station, and the handover may be performed. The target cell is the first cell provided by the micro base station, and the user equipment maintains the downlink transmission with the macro cell.
可选的, 在源基站为宏基站且目标基站为 基站的实施场景下, 切换前 向用户设备提供服务的源基站对应的小区可以覆盖微基站提供的第一小区, 或宏基站与微基站提供的频率可以有重叠。  Optionally, in a scenario where the source base station is a macro base station and the target base station is a base station, the cell corresponding to the source base station that provides the service to the user equipment before the handover may cover the first cell provided by the micro base station, or the macro base station and the micro base station provide The frequencies can overlap.
源基站确定目标基站后, 可以向目标基站发送切换请求, 切换请求中具 有用户设备待切换的下行传输信息, 以便切换后用户设备保持与源基站的上 行传输且在经由目标基站进行下行传输; 或者, 切换请求中具有用户设备待 切换的上行传输信息, 以便在切换后用户设备保持与源基站的下行传输且经 由目标基站进行上行传输。  After the source base station determines the target base station, the source base station may send a handover request to the target base station, where the handover request has downlink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment, so that the user equipment maintains the uplink transmission with the source base station and performs downlink transmission through the target base station after the handover; The handover request has uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment, so that after the handover, the user equipment maintains downlink transmission with the source base station and performs uplink transmission via the target base station.
在另一种实施场景下, 微基站可以 (例如可以为源基站或目标基站) 以 较低功率向用户设备发送下行数据, 用户设备可以以较高功率向宏基站 (例 如可以为目标基站或源基站 )发送上行数据。 同样, 可以降低基站对用户设 备的干扰, 从而提高小区吞吐量和频谱效率。 本领域的技术人员可以理解, 该实施场景可以应用于用户设备距离微基站中心比距离宏基站中心更近的场 景, 也可以应用于其他场景, 在此不再赘述。  In another implementation scenario, the micro base station may send downlink data to the user equipment at a lower power (for example, the source base station or the target base station), and the user equipment may transmit the macro data to the macro base station (for example, may be the target base station or source). The base station) transmits uplink data. Similarly, the interference of the base station to the user equipment can be reduced, thereby improving cell throughput and spectrum efficiency. It can be understood by those skilled in the art that the implementation scenario can be applied to a scene in which the user equipment is closer to the center of the micro base station than the center of the macro base station, and can be applied to other scenarios, and details are not described herein again.
在本实施例中, 下行资源配置信息和切换请求中具有的下行传输信息包 括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类型指示。 可选的, 下行传输信息还可 以包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个演进的无线接入承载 ( Evolved Radio Access Bearer, E-RAB )标识、 至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB 服务质量参数、 无线资源控制 (Radio Resource Control , RRC ) 上下文 ( context )信息, 其中 RRC上下文信息可以包含下行无线资源专用配置信 息和 /或用户设备的小区 -无线网络临时标识 C-RNTI信息。 In this embodiment, the downlink resource configuration information and the downlink transmission information included in the handover request include a handover type indication for indicating downlink transmission handover. Optionally, the downlink transmission information may further include one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer (Evolved) The radio access bearer (E-RAB) identifier, the E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and the radio resource control (RRC) context information, where the RRC context information may include the downlink radio resource. The dedicated configuration information and/or the cell-radio network temporary identification C-RNTI information of the user equipment.
类似的, 切换请求中具有的上行传输信息和上行资源配置信息包括用于 指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指示。 可选的, 上行传输信息还可以包括 以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 E-RAB标识、 至少一个 E-RAB标识对应 的 E-RAB服务质量参数、无线资源控制上下文信息, 其中无线资源控制上下 文可以包含:上行无线资源专用配置信息和 /或用户设备的小区-无线网络临时 标识 ( Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier, C-RNTI )信息。  Similarly, the uplink transmission information and the uplink resource configuration information included in the handover request include a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover. Optionally, the uplink transmission information may further include one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, at least one E-RAB identifier corresponding to the E-RAB quality of service parameter, and radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control The context may include: uplink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell radio network Temporary Identifier (C-RNTI) information of the user equipment.
可以理解的是, 切换请求中还可以具有其他无线资源配置信息, 在此不 ——列举。  It can be understood that other radio resource configuration information may also be included in the handover request, which is not listed here.
作为一种可行的实施方式, 目标基站在接收到源基站发送的切换请求后, 可以为用户设备分配待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换 的上行传输对应的上行资源配置信息。 在该实施场景下, 目标基站可以在发 送给源基站的切换响应中携带目标基站为用户设备分配的待切换的下行传输 对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源配置信息。 源基站可以向用户设备发送切换命令, 该切换命令中可以具有为用户设备分 配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输对应 的上行资源配置信息。  As a possible implementation manner, after receiving the handover request sent by the source base station, the target base station may allocate, to the user equipment, downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched. In this implementation scenario, the target base station may carry the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, which is allocated by the target base station to the user equipment, in the handover response sent to the source base station. The source base station may send a handover command to the user equipment, where the handover command may have downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
作为另一种可行的实施方式, 源基站可以预先向目标基站发送无线资源 分配请求消息, 该分配请求消息用于目标基站在第一小区中为用户设备分配 待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源。 即, 源基站可以预先请求在目标基站的第一小区中为用户设备分配待切换的 下行传输对应的下行资源或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源, 而不进行 切换过程。  As another possible implementation, the source base station may send a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station in advance, where the allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched to the user equipment in the first cell or The uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched. That is, the source base station may request in advance, in the first cell of the target base station, the user equipment to allocate the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or the uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, without performing the handover procedure.
在该实施场景下, 源基站可以在确定将用户设备的上行传输或下行传输 切换到目标基站之后,向目标基站发送切换请求并向用户设备发送切换命令, 该切换请求一方面可以指示目标基站使用下行传输对应的下行资源或者上行 传输对应的上行资源, 另一方面可以同切换命令, 还用于指示是否允许上行 传输和下行传输分离。 In this implementation scenario, after determining that the uplink or downlink transmission of the user equipment is switched to the target base station, the source base station may send a handover request to the target base station and send a handover command to the user equipment, where the handover request may indicate the target base station to use. The downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission or the uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission may be the same as the handover command, and is also used to indicate whether the uplink is allowed. The transmission and downlink transmission are separated.
相应的, 源基站还可以向用户设备发送媒体接入控制层单元 MAC CE, 用于指示是否允许上行传输和下行传输分离。  Correspondingly, the source base station may further send a medium access control layer unit MAC CE to the user equipment, to indicate whether to allow uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation.
需要说明的是, 对于移动速度较慢的用户设备, 在目标基站预先为该用 户设备分配上行资源或下行资源后, 源基站可以通过切换命令通知用户设备 进行上行传输和下行传输分离; 而对于移动速度较快的用户设备, 在目标基 站预先为该用户设备分配上行资源或下行资源后, 源基站可以通过 MAC CE 通知用户设备进行上行传输和下行传输分离, 这种实施方式与通过切换请求 和切换命令的方法比较, 可以降低切换延迟。  It should be noted that, for a user equipment with a slow moving speed, after the target base station allocates uplink resources or downlink resources to the user equipment in advance, the source base station may notify the user equipment to perform uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation by using a handover command; After the target base station allocates uplink resources or downlink resources to the user equipment in advance, the source base station may notify the user equipment to perform uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation by using the MAC CE, and the implementation manner and the handover request and handover are performed. The comparison of the command methods can reduce the switching delay.
可选的, 目标基站为用户设备分配的下行资源配置信息包括以下一种或 任意种组合: 信令无线承载 SRB下行配置信息、 数据无线承载 DRB下行配 置信息、 媒体接入控制 MAC下行配置信息、 物理下行共享信道 PDSCH配 置信息。  Optionally, the downlink resource configuration information allocated by the target base station to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: signaling radio bearer SRB downlink configuration information, data radio bearer DRB downlink configuration information, media access control MAC downlink configuration information, Physical downlink shared channel PDSCH configuration information.
SRB下行配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: SRB标识、无线链路控 制 (radio link control, RLC ) 下行配置、 逻辑信道标识等信息; DRB下行配 置信息包括演进的分组系统 载标识( eps-bearer Identity )、 DRB标识、 分 组数据';匚聚十办议 ( packet data convergence protocol, PDCP ) 下行酉己置、 无 线链路控制 (RLC ) 下行配置、 逻辑信道标识。  The SRB downlink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: SRB identifier, radio link control (RLC) downlink configuration, logical channel identifier, and the like; DRB downlink configuration information includes an evolved packet system identifier (eps- Bearer Identity), DRB identifier, packet data '; packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) downlink configuration, radio link control (RLC) downlink configuration, logical channel identification.
其中, 分组数据汇聚协议下行配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 丟 弃定时器配置、 头压缩协议配置、 对于无线链路控制确认模式 ( RLC acknowledged mode, RLC AM )是否需要在切换时发送 PDCP状态报告、 对于无线链路控制非确认模式(RLC unacknowledged mode, RLC UM ) 时 PDCP序列号长度等信息。  The downlink data configuration protocol downlink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: a drop timer configuration, a header compression protocol configuration, and whether the RLC acknowledged mode (RLC AM) needs to be sent during handover. PDCP status report, information such as the length of the PDCP sequence number when the radio link control is not confirmed mode (RLC unacknowledged mode, RLC UM).
其中, 无线链路控制下行配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 下行 RLC-AM配置、 下行 RLC-UM配置等信息。 下行 RLC-AM配置包括以下一 种或任意种组合:重排序定时器配置、 RLC状态报告禁止定时器配置等信息。 下行 RLC-UM配置包括以下一种或任意种组合: 序列号长度配置、 重排序定 时器配置等信息。  The radio link control downlink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: downlink RLC-AM configuration, downlink RLC-UM configuration, and the like. The downlink RLC-AM configuration includes one or any combination of the following: reordering timer configuration, RLC status reporting, prohibiting timer configuration, and the like. The downlink RLC-UM configuration includes one or any combination of the following: serial number length configuration, reorder timer configuration, and so on.
其中, MAC 下行配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 不连续接收 ( discontinuous reception: DRX ) 配置、 辅小区去激活定时器配置等信息。 其中 PDSCH配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组合:参考信号功率配置、 参考信号每资源元素功率与 PDSCH每资源元素功率比值配置等信息。 The MAC downlink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: discontinuous reception (DRX) configuration, secondary cell deactivation timer configuration, and the like. The PDSCH configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: a reference signal power configuration, a reference signal per resource element power, and a PDSCH resource element power ratio configuration.
类似的, 目标基站为用户设备分配的上行资源配置信息包括以下一种或 任意种组合: SRB上行配置信息、 DRB上行配置信息、 MAC上行配置信息、 PUSCH配置信息。  Similarly, the uplink resource configuration information allocated by the target base station to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink configuration information, DRB uplink configuration information, MAC uplink configuration information, and PUSCH configuration information.
SRB上行配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: SRB标识、无线链路控 制上行配置、 逻辑信道标识、 逻辑信道上行配置等信息; DRB上行配置信息 包括以下一种或任意种组合: 演进的分组系统承载标识 ( eps-bearer Identity ), DRB标识、 分组数据汇聚协议配置上行配置、 无线链路控制上行 配置、 逻辑信道标识、 逻辑信道上行配置等信息。  The SRB uplink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: SRB identifier, radio link control uplink configuration, logical channel identifier, logical channel uplink configuration, and the like; the DRB uplink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: System bearer identifier (eps-bearer Identity), DRB identifier, packet data convergence protocol configuration uplink configuration, radio link control uplink configuration, logical channel identifier, logical channel uplink configuration and other information.
其中分组数据汇聚协议上行配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 丟弃 定时器配置、 头压缩协议配置、 对于无线链路控制确认模式(RLC AM )是 否需要在切换时发送 PDCP状态报告、 对于无线链路控制非确认模式(RLC UM ) 时 PDCP序列号长度等信息。  The packet data convergence protocol uplink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: a drop timer configuration, a header compression protocol configuration, whether a radio link control acknowledgement mode (RLC AM) needs to send a PDCP status report during handover, Information such as the length of the PDCP sequence number when the radio link controls the non-acknowledgement mode (RLC UM).
其中, 无线链路控制上行配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 上行 The radio link control uplink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following:
RLC-AM配置、 上行 RLC-UM配置等信息。 上行 RLC-AM配置包括以下一 种或任意种组合: 轮询 (poll ) 重传定时器配置、 轮询 PDU个数配置、 轮询 字节个数配置、 RLC PDU最大重传次数配置等信息。 下行 RLC-UM配置包 括序列号长度配置等信息。 Information such as RLC-AM configuration and uplink RLC-UM configuration. The uplink RLC-AM configuration includes one or any combination of the following: polling (re) retransmission timer configuration, polling PDU number configuration, polling byte number configuration, and RLC PDU maximum retransmission times configuration. The downlink RLC-UM configuration includes information such as the serial number length configuration.
其中, 逻辑信道上行配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 逻辑信道优 先级配置、 逻辑信道优先比特速率配置、 逻辑信道组、 令牌桶算法参数配置 等信息。  The logical channel uplink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: logical channel priority configuration, logical channel priority bit rate configuration, logical channel group, token bucket algorithm parameter configuration, and the like.
其中, MAC上行配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: DRX配置、 上 行共享传输信道配置、 功率余量 ^艮告配置、辅小区去激活定时器配置等信息。  The MAC uplink configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: DRX configuration, uplink shared transport channel configuration, power headroom configuration, and secondary cell deactivation timer configuration.
其中, PUSCH 配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 跳频参数配置、 是否允许高阶调制配置、 上行参考信号配置等信息。  The PUSCH configuration information includes one or any combination of the following: frequency hopping parameter configuration, whether high-order modulation configuration, uplink reference signal configuration, and the like are allowed.
上述 SRB/DRB/MAC下行 /上行配置信息、 PDSCH/PUSCH配置信息等 如无特别说明也适用于以下各实施例。  The above SRB/DRB/MAC downlink/uplink configuration information, PDSCH/PUSCH configuration information, and the like are also applicable to the following embodiments unless otherwise specified.
源基站向用户设备发送切换命令, 切换命令中具有目标基站为用户设备 分配待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输对应 的上行资源配置信息。 其中, 下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下行传输 切换的切换类型指示, 或者, 上行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行上行传输 切换的切换类型指示。 The source base station sends a handover command to the user equipment, where the target base station allocates downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched to the user equipment or the uplink transmission corresponding to the handover Upstream resource configuration information. The downlink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
可选的, 源基站向用户设备发送的切换命令中, 还可以携带指示标识, 指示标识可以用于指示用户设备与目标基站新建用于承载待切换的下行传输 的下行链路并保留与源基站之间的上行链路, 或用于承载所述待切换的上行 传输的上行链路并保留与所述源基站之间的下行链路。 在该种场景下, 切换 时, 用户设备与源基站通过保留的上行链路或下行链路正常通信, 切换完成 后, 用户设备与目标基站通过切换后的下行链路或上行链路正常通信。  Optionally, the handover command sent by the source base station to the user equipment may further include an indication identifier, where the indication identifier may be used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched and retain the source base station. An uplink between the uplinks, or an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be handed over, and retaining a downlink with the source base station. In this scenario, when the handover is performed, the user equipment and the source base station communicate normally through the reserved uplink or downlink. After the handover is completed, the user equipment and the target base station communicate normally through the switched downlink or uplink.
可选的, 上述指示标识可以用于指示用户设备与目标基站新建用于承载 待切换的下行传输的下行链路并删除与源基站之间的下行链路, 或用于承载 待切换的上行传输的上行链路并删除与源基站之间的上行链路。 在该种删除 用户设备与源基站之间的下行链路或上行链路的实施场景下, 则在源基站所 保留的上行链路或下行链路能够继续通信。  Optionally, the foregoing indication identifier may be used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying downlink transmissions to be switched and delete a downlink between the source base station, or used to carry uplink transmissions to be switched. Uplink and remove the uplink from the source base station. In the implementation scenario of deleting the downlink or uplink between the user equipment and the source base station, the uplink or downlink reserved by the source base station can continue to communicate.
可选的, 上述指示标识可以用于指示用户设备与目标基站新建用于承载 待切换的下行传输的下行链路或上行链路, 并保留与源基站之间的下行链路 和上行链路。 在该种用户设备保留与源基站之间的下行链路和上行链路的实 施场景下,在切换过程中用户设备与源基站的上行和下行通信可以继续进行, 减少了切换过程中业务时延或业务中断时间。  Optionally, the foregoing indication identifier may be used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink or an uplink for carrying downlink transmissions to be switched, and reserve downlink and uplink with the source base station. In the implementation scenario of the downlink and the uplink between the user equipment and the source base station, the uplink and downlink communications between the user equipment and the source base station may continue during the handover process, and the service delay in the handover process is reduced. Or business interruption time.
本发明实施例提供的切换方法, 源基站将用户设备的上行传输或下行传 输切换至目标基站, 从而使用户设备在切换后的上行传输和下行传输中的一 个由源基站提供的小区服务, 另一个由目标基站提供的小区服务。 例如, 可 以是用户设备以较低的功率向微基站发送上行数据, 并且宏基站可以以较强 的发射功率向用户设备发送下行数据。 又如, 当用户设备距离微基站中心更 近时, 微基站以较低功率向用户设备发送下行数据, 用户设备以较高功率向 宏基站发送上行数据。 从而, 可以降低基站对用户设备的干扰, 从而提高小 区吞吐量和频谱效率。  In the handover method provided by the embodiment of the present invention, the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station, so that the user equipment provides a cell service provided by the source base station in the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission after the handover, and A cell service provided by the target base station. For example, the user equipment may send uplink data to the micro base station at a lower power, and the macro base station may send downlink data to the user equipment with a stronger transmission power. For another example, when the user equipment is closer to the center of the micro base station, the micro base station sends downlink data to the user equipment with lower power, and the user equipment sends the uplink data to the macro base station with higher power. Thereby, the interference of the base station to the user equipment can be reduced, thereby improving the cell throughput and the spectrum efficiency.
本实施例提供了一种将用户设备的上行传输或下行传输切换至目标基 站, 以使用户设备的上行和下行与不同的基站进行通信的方法, 该方法同样 适用于现有的载波类型和新载波类型 (New Carrier Type, NCT ), 新载波类 型可以发送或不发送主同步信号 /辅同步信号等, 在 NCT上可以发送增强的 物理下行控制信道( E-PDCCH )或者由其它载波通过 PDCCH或者 E-PDCCH 进行交叉调度。 图 2为本发明提供的切换方法又一个实施例的流程图, 于上一实施例不 同之处在于该方法可以由目标基站执行, 如图 2, 该方法包括: This embodiment provides a method for switching uplink or downlink transmission of a user equipment to a target base station, so that uplink and downlink of the user equipment communicate with different base stations, and the method is also applicable to existing carrier types and new Carrier Type (NCT), new carrier class The type may or may not transmit a primary synchronization signal/secondary synchronization signal, etc., and may transmit an enhanced physical downlink control channel (E-PDCCH) on the NCT or perform cross-scheduling by other carriers through the PDCCH or the E-PDCCH. 2 is a flowchart of still another embodiment of a handover method according to the present invention. The difference in the previous embodiment is that the method can be performed by a target base station. As shown in FIG. 2, the method includes:
S201、 目标基站接收源基站发送的切换请求, 切换请求具有用户设备待 切换的下行传输信息或上行传输信息。  S201. The target base station receives a handover request sent by the source base station, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment.
S202、 目标基站确定允许用户设备的下行传输或上行传输切换至目标基 站提供的第一小区。  S202. The target base station determines to allow the downlink transmission or the uplink transmission of the user equipment to be handed over to the first cell provided by the target base station.
S203、 目标基站向源基站发送为用户设备分配的待切换的下行传输对应 的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源配置信息, 以便 切换后用户设备保持与源基站的上行传输且经由目标基站进行下行传输, 或 以便切换后用户设备保持与源基站间的下行传输且经由目标基站进行上行传 输。  S203. The target base station sends, to the source base station, the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched and the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so that the user equipment maintains the uplink transmission with the source base station after the handover. Downlink transmission is performed via the target base station, or the user equipment maintains downlink transmission with the source base station and performs uplink transmission via the target base station after handover.
其中, 下行传输信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类型指示, 或者, 上行传输信息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指示。  The downlink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
在一种实施场景下, 源基站可以为啟基站, 目标基站可以为宏基站, 目 标基站接收的切换请求中可以具有用户设备待切换的下行传输信息, 以使用 户设备的下行传输由微基站切换至宏基站。  In an implementation scenario, the source base station may be a base station, and the target base station may be a macro base station. The handover request received by the target base station may have downlink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment, so that downlink transmission of the user equipment is switched by the micro base station. To the macro base station.
可选的 ,下行传输信息可以包括以下一种或任意种组合:至少一个 E-RAB 标识、 至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上 下文信息, 其中无线资源控制上下文信息可以包含: 下行无线资源专用配置 信息和 /或用户设备的小区 -无线网络临时标识 C-RNTI信息。  Optionally, the downlink transmission information may include one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, at least one E-RAB identifier corresponding to the E-RAB quality of service parameter, and radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control context The information may include: downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identity C-RNTI information of the user equipment.
在另一种实施场景下, 源基站可以为宏基站, 目标基站可以为 基站, 目标基站接收的切换请求中可以具有用户设备待切换的上行传输信息, 以使 用户设备的上行传输由宏基站切换至微基站。  In another implementation scenario, the source base station may be a macro base station, and the target base station may be a base station. The handover request received by the target base station may have uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment, so that the uplink transmission of the user equipment is switched by the macro base station. To the micro base station.
类似的 ,上行传输信息可以包括以下一种或任意种组合:至少一个 E-RAB 标识、 至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上 下文信息, 其中无线资源控制上下文信息可以包含: 上行无线资源专用配置 信息和 /或用户设备的小区 -无线网络临时标识 C-RNTI信息。 Similarly, the uplink transmission information may include one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, at least one E-RAB identifier corresponding to the E-RAB quality of service parameter, and radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control context information Can include: Upstream radio resource specific configuration The cell-radio network temporary identification C-RNTI information of the information and/or user equipment.
在本实施例中, 目标基站接收到切换请求后可以执行接纳控制, 以判断 是否允许用户设备的下行传输或上行传输切换至目标基站提供的第一小区。 若目标基站允许用户设备的下行传输或上行传输切换至目标基站提供的第一 小区, 则目标基站可以向源基站发送切换响应。  In this embodiment, after receiving the handover request, the target base station may perform admission control to determine whether to allow downlink transmission or uplink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the first cell provided by the target base station. If the target base station allows the downlink transmission or the uplink transmission of the user equipment to be handed over to the first cell provided by the target base station, the target base station may send a handover response to the source base station.
作为一种可行的实施方式, 目标基站确定允许用户设备的下行传输或上 行传输切换至目标基站提供的第一小区之后, 可以为用户设备分配待切换的 下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源配 置信息。 目标基站可以在发送给源基站的切换响应中携带目标基站为用户设 备分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输 对应的上行资源配置信息。  As a possible implementation manner, after the target base station determines that the downlink transmission or the uplink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the first cell provided by the target base station, the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched may be allocated to the user equipment or is to be switched. Uplink resource corresponding uplink resource configuration information. The target base station may carry the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched and the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched that the target base station allocates to the user equipment.
作为另一种可行的实施方式, 源基站可以预先向目标基站发送无线资源 分配请求消息, 在该实施场景下, 目标基站可以在第一小区中为用户设备分 配待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输对应的 上行资源配置信息。 在该实施场景下, 目标基站接收到源基站发送的切换请 求用于指示是否允许上行传输和下行传输分离。  As another possible implementation manner, the source base station may send a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station in advance, where the target base station may allocate, in the first cell, the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched in the first cell. Configuration information or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched. In this implementation scenario, the target base station receives the handover request sent by the source base station to indicate whether to allow uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation.
可选的, 目标基站为用户设备分配的下行资源配置信息可以包括以下一 种或任意种组合: SRB下行配置信息、 DRB下行配置信息、 MAC下行配置 信息和 PDSCH配置信息。  Optionally, the downlink resource configuration information allocated by the target base station to the user equipment may include one or any combination of the following: SRB downlink configuration information, DRB downlink configuration information, MAC downlink configuration information, and PDSCH configuration information.
类似的, 目标基站为用户设备分配的上行资源配置信息可以包括以下一 种或任意种组合: SRB上行配置信息、 DRB上行配置信息、 MAC上行配置 信息和 PUSCH配置信息。  Similarly, the uplink resource configuration information allocated by the target base station to the user equipment may include one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink configuration information, DRB uplink configuration information, MAC uplink configuration information, and PUSCH configuration information.
本发明实施例提供的切换方法, 源基站将用户设备的上行传输或下行传 输切换至目标基站, 目标基站可以允许用户设备的上行传输或下行传输切换 至目标基站, 从而使用户设备的上行传输和下行传输中的一个由源基站提供 的小区服务, 另一个由目标基站提供的小区服务, 从而提高小区吞吐量和频 谱效率。 图 3为本发明提供的切换方法另一个实施例的流程图, 与上述其余方法 实施例不同之处在于, 该方法可以由用户设备执行, 如图 3, 该方法包括: 5301、 用户设备接收源基站发送的切换命令, 切换命令中具有为用户设 备分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输 对应的上行资源配置信息。 In the handover method provided by the embodiment of the present invention, the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station, and the target base station may allow the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the target base station, thereby enabling the uplink transmission of the user equipment. One of the downlink transmissions is provided by the cell service provided by the source base station, and the other is provided by the target base station, thereby improving cell throughput and spectrum efficiency. FIG. 3 is a flowchart of another embodiment of a handover method according to the present invention. The method is different from the foregoing method embodiments. The method may be performed by a user equipment. As shown in FIG. 3, the method includes: The user equipment receives the handover command sent by the source base station, where the handover command has the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched and the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
5302、 用户设备根据下行资源配置信息进行下行资源配置, 切换后保持 与源基站的上行传输且在经由目标基站进行下行传输; 或根据上行资源配置 信息进行上行资源配置, 切换后保持与源基站间的下行传输且经由目标基站 进行上行传输。  The user equipment performs the downlink resource configuration according to the downlink resource configuration information, and maintains the uplink transmission with the source base station after the handover and performs downlink transmission through the target base station; or performs uplink resource configuration according to the uplink resource configuration information, and maintains the source and the base station after the handover. Downlink transmission and uplink transmission via the target base station.
其中, 下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类型指 示, 或, 上行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指示。  The downlink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
在一种实施场景下, 源基站可以为微基站, 用户设备当前的服务小区为 微基站提供的微小区, 用户设备与微小区进行上行通信和下行通信。 在该实 施场景下, 源基站可以确定将用户设备的下行传输从微小区切换到宏基站提 供的宏小区, 即, 切换的目标基站可以为宏基站, 切换的目标小区为宏基站 提供的第一小区。  In an implementation scenario, the source base station may be a micro base station, and the current serving cell of the user equipment is a micro cell provided by the micro base station, and the user equipment performs uplink communication and downlink communication with the micro cell. In this implementation scenario, the source base station may determine to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment from the micro cell to the macro cell provided by the macro base station, that is, the target base station to be handed over may be a macro base station, and the target cell to be switched is the first provided by the macro base station. Community.
在另一种实施场景下, 源基站还可以为宏基站, 用户设备当前的服务小 区为宏基站提供的宏小区, 用户设备与宏小区进行上行通信和下行通信。 在 该实施场景下, 源基站可以确定将用户设备的上行传输从宏小区切换到微基 站提供的微小区, 即, 切换的目标基站可以为微基站, 切换的目标小区为微 基站提供的第一小区。  In another implementation scenario, the source base station may also be a macro base station, where the current service cell of the user equipment is a macro cell provided by the macro base station, and the user equipment performs uplink communication and downlink communication with the macro cell. In this implementation scenario, the source base station may determine to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment from the macro cell to the micro cell provided by the micro base station, that is, the target base station to be handed over may be a micro base station, and the target cell to be switched is the first provided by the micro base station. Community.
在一种实施场景下, 用户设备可以接收到源基站发送的切换命令, 该切 换命令中具有为用户设备分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信 息, 以指示用户设备将下行传输切换至目标小区。  In an implementation scenario, the user equipment may receive a handover command sent by the source base station, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated for the user equipment, to indicate that the user equipment switches the downlink transmission to Target cell.
在该实施场景下, 用户设备可以根据下行资源配置信息, 进行下行资源 配置, 具体的: 用户设备可以复位媒体接入控制 MAC 的下行链路, 重建分 组数据汇聚协议 PDCP实体的下行链路, 重建无线链路控制 RLC实体的下 行链路, 配置 PDCP实体的下行传输和 RLC实体的下行传输。 或者, 用户 设备也可以复位媒体接入控制 MAC 的下行链路, 重建分组数据汇聚协议 PDCP实体的下行链路,重建无线链路控制 RLC实体的下行链路,配置 PDCP 实体的上行传输和下行传输, 以及 RLC实体的上行传输和下行传输。  In this implementation scenario, the user equipment may perform downlink resource configuration according to the downlink resource configuration information. Specifically, the user equipment may reset the downlink of the media access control MAC, reestablish the downlink of the packet data convergence protocol PDCP entity, and reconstruct The radio link controls the downlink of the RLC entity, and configures the downlink transmission of the PDCP entity and the downlink transmission of the RLC entity. Alternatively, the user equipment may also reset the downlink of the medium access control MAC, reestablish the downlink of the packet data convergence protocol PDCP entity, reconstruct the downlink of the radio link control RLC entity, and configure the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the PDCP entity. , and uplink transmission and downlink transmission of the RLC entity.
在本实施例中, 上述针对 MAC、 RLC、 及 PDCP的下行操作, 均可以 单独针对需要切换到目标基站的下行链路而言。 当用户设备配置了 PDCP实 体和 RLC实体的上行传输后, 后续如果要切换与源基站间的上行链路时, 可 以通过 MAC实体的控制信令直接启用, 而不需要再经过 RLC实体。 In this embodiment, the foregoing downlink operations for MAC, RLC, and PDCP can be performed. Separately for the downlink that needs to be handed over to the target base station. After the user equipment is configured with the uplink transmission of the PDCP entity and the RLC entity, if the uplink between the source and the base station is to be switched subsequently, the user equipment may directly enable the control by the MAC entity without passing through the RLC entity.
其中对于复位 MAC的下行链路, 可以包括: 停止在运行的所有 MAC下 行配置的定时器、 清空所有下行混合自动重传请求( hybrid automatic repeat request, HARQ )进程 ( process )的緩冲区、 对于每个下行 HARQ进程认为 下一次接收到的 TB为第一个 TB、如果有则译放临时小区 -无线网络临时标识 ( temporary cell-radio network temporary identifier, Temporary C-RNTI )等 操作。  The downlink for resetting the MAC may include: stopping a timer configured for all MAC downlinks in operation, and clearing a buffer of all hybrid automatic repeat request (HQQ) processes (process) Each downlink HARQ process considers that the next received TB is the first TB, and if so, the temporary cell-radio network temporary identifier (temporary C-RNTI) is operated.
其中对于重建 PDCP实体的下行链路, 可以按照下行数据传输重建过程 对于映射到 RLC-AM的 DRB、 映射到 RLC-UM的 DRB和 SRB分别执行相 应的操作。  For the downlink of the reconstructed PDCP entity, the downlink data transmission and reconstruction process may be performed separately for the DRB mapped to the RLC-AM and the DRB and the SRB mapped to the RLC-UM.
其中对于重建 RLC实体的下行链路,可以按照 RLC重建中接收 RLC UM 实体、 RLC AM实体的接收端分别执行相应的操作。  For the downlink of the RLC entity to be reconstructed, the receiving end of the RLC UM entity and the RLC AM entity in the RLC reconstruction may perform corresponding operations.
上述复位 MAC的下行链路、 重建 PDCP实体的下行链路、 重建 RLC实 体的下行链路的过程适用于以下各实施例。  The process of resetting the downlink of the MAC, reestablishing the downlink of the PDCP entity, and reconstructing the downlink of the RLC entity is applicable to the following embodiments.
可选的, 用户设备接收的所述切换命令中还可以携带指示标识, 所述指 示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载待切换的下行传 输的下行链路, 并保留与所述源基站之间的上行链路。 从而使得在切换过程 中用户设备和源基站之间的上行通信可以继续进行。  Optionally, the handover command that is received by the user equipment may further include an indication identifier, where the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying downlink transmissions to be switched, and The uplink with the source base station is reserved. Thereby, the uplink communication between the user equipment and the source base station can be continued during the handover.
进一步, 所述指示标识还可以用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新 建用于承载待切换的下行传输的下行链路, 并保留与所述源基站之间的下行 链路和上行链路。 从而使得在切换过程中用户设备和源基站之间的下行通信 和上行通信可以继续进行, 减少了业务延时或业务中断。  Further, the indication identifier may be further used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying downlink transmissions to be switched, and reserve downlink and uplink with the source base station. road. Therefore, the downlink communication and the uplink communication between the user equipment and the source base station can be continued during the handover process, which reduces service delay or service interruption.
可选的, 用户设备可以将 PDCP 实体划分为上行 PDCP 实体和下行 Optionally, the user equipment can divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and downlink.
PDCP实体, 上行 PDCP实体与源基站提供的第二小区对应, 下行 PDCP实 体与目标基站提供的第一小区对应。 类似的, 用户设备还可以将 RLC实体划 分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体,上行 RLC实体与源基站提供的第二小 区对应, 下行 RLC实体与目标基站提供的第一小区对应。 其中, 用户设备经 由第一小区与目标基站进行下行传输, 并经由第二小区与源基站进行上行传 输。 进一步而言, 源基站为微基站, 目标基站为宏基站。 The PDCP entity, the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station. Similarly, the user equipment may further divide the RLC entity into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, where the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station. The user equipment performs downlink transmission with the target base station via the first cell, and performs uplink transmission with the source base station via the second cell. Lose. Further, the source base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station.
通过将 PDCP实体上下行分开或 RLC实体上下行分开, 在切换过程中 用户设备对上行 PDCP实体和下行 PDCP实体、 上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC 实体可以分别重建和配置。 故, 上述用户设备不需要对整个 PDCP 实体和 RLC实体重建和配置, 可以使未发生切换的上行传输或下行传输继续通信, 提高了切换效率和灵活性。在本实施例中, 上行 PDCP实体和下行 PDCP实 体、 上行 RLC 实体和下行 RLC 实体可以分别对应 RLC 非确认模式 ( unacknowledged mode ) 的上行实体和下行实体。  The user equipment can rebuild and configure the uplink PDCP entity, the downlink PDCP entity, the uplink RLC entity, and the downlink RLC entity respectively in the handover process by separating the uplink and downlink of the PDCP entity or the uplink and downlink of the RLC entity. Therefore, the user equipment does not need to rebuild and configure the entire PDCP entity and the RLC entity, and can continue to communicate with the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission without switching, thereby improving handover efficiency and flexibility. In this embodiment, the uplink PDCP entity and the downlink PDCP entity, the uplink RLC entity, and the downlink RLC entity may respectively correspond to an uplink entity and a downlink entity of the RLC unacknowledged mode.
可选的,用户设备也可以不把 PDCP实体划分为上行 PDCP实体和下行 PDCP实体。 具体而言, 用户设备可以将 PDCP实体的上行传输与源基站提 供的第二小区对应, 将 PDCP实体的下行传输与目标基站提供的第一小区对 应。类似的,用户设备也可以不把 RLC实体划分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC 实体。 具体而言, 用户设备可以将 RLC实体的上行传输与源基站提供的第二 小区对应, 将 RLC实体的下行传输与目标基站提供的第一小区对应。 其中, 用户设备经由第一小区与目标基站进行下行传输, 并经由第二小区与源基站 进行上行传输。 进一步而言, 源基站为微基站, 目标基站为宏基站。 通过单 独将 PDCP实体或 RLC实体的下行传输与目标基站对应, 或单独将 PDCP 实体或 RLC实体的上行传输与源基站对应,在切换过程中用户设备同样可以 对上行传输或下行传输分别重建和配置, 降低信令开销及实现复杂度。  Optionally, the user equipment may also not divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity. Specifically, the user equipment may correspond to the uplink transmission of the PDCP entity to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink transmission of the PDCP entity to the first cell provided by the target base station. Similarly, the user equipment may not divide the RLC entity into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity. Specifically, the user equipment may correspond to the uplink of the RLC entity to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink transmission of the RLC entity to the first cell provided by the target base station. The user equipment performs downlink transmission with the target base station via the first cell, and performs uplink transmission with the source base station via the second cell. Further, the source base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station. The uplink transmission of the PDCP entity or the RLC entity is corresponding to the target base station, or the uplink transmission of the PDCP entity or the RLC entity is corresponding to the source base station. In the handover process, the user equipment can also reconstruct and configure the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission separately. , reduce signaling overhead and implementation complexity.
在另一种实施场景下, 用户设备接收到源基站发送的切换命令中可以携 带为用户设备分配的待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源配置信息, 以指示用 户设备将上行传输切换至目标小区。  In another implementation scenario, the user equipment receives the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched allocated for the user equipment in the handover command sent by the source base station, to indicate that the user equipment switches the uplink transmission to the target cell.
在该实施场景下, 用户设备可以根据上行资源配置信息进行上行资源配 置, 具体的: 用户设备可以复位 MAC的上行链路, 可以重建 PDCP实体的 上行链路, 可以重建无线链路控制 RLC 实体的上行链路, 可以配置 PDCP 实体的上行传输和 RLC实体的上行传输, 重建 PDCP实体的上行链路。 或 者, 用户设备也可以复位 MAC的上行, 可以重建 PDCP实体的上行链路, 可以重建无线链路控制 RLC实体的上行链路, 重建 PDCP实体的上行链路, 配置 PDCP实体的上行传输和下行传输, 以及配置 RLC实体的上行传输和 下行传输。 其中对于复位 MAC的上行链路, 可以包括: 停止在运行的所有 MAC上 行配置的定时器、 认为时间调整定时器(time alignment timer )超时、 设置 所有上行 HARQ进程的新数据指示( new data identifier, NDI )为 0、 如果有 正在进行的随机接入过程则停止正在进行的随机接入过程、 如果有已分配的 随机接入专用前导则丟弃已分配的随机接入专用前导、 如果有已经触发的调 度请求过程则取消已经触发的调度请求过程、 如果有已经触发的緩冲区状态 报告过程则取消已经触发的緩冲区状态报告过程、 如果有已经触发的功率余 量报告过程则取消已经触发的功率余量报告过程、 如果有已分配的临时小区- 无线网络临时标识则译放临时小区-无线网络临时标识( Temporary C-RNTI ) 等操作。 In this implementation scenario, the user equipment may perform uplink resource configuration according to the uplink resource configuration information. Specifically, the user equipment may reset the uplink of the MAC, re-establish the uplink of the PDCP entity, and re-establish the radio link control RLC entity. On the uplink, the uplink transmission of the PDCP entity and the uplink transmission of the RLC entity can be configured to reconstruct the uplink of the PDCP entity. Alternatively, the user equipment may also reset the uplink of the MAC, re-establish the uplink of the PDCP entity, re-establish the uplink of the radio link control RLC entity, re-establish the uplink of the PDCP entity, and configure the uplink transmission and downlink transmission of the PDCP entity. And configuring the uplink and downlink transmissions of the RLC entity. The uplink for resetting the MAC may include: stopping a timer configured for all MAC uplinks in operation, considering that a time alignment timer expires, and setting a new data identifier for all uplink HARQ processes (new data identifier, NDI) is 0. If there is an ongoing random access procedure, the ongoing random access procedure is stopped, and if there is an allocated random access dedicated preamble, the allocated random access dedicated preamble is discarded, if there is already triggered The scheduling request process cancels the already triggered scheduling request process, and if there is a buffer status reporting process that has been triggered, cancels the buffer status reporting process that has been triggered, and if there is already triggered power headroom reporting process, the cancellation has already been triggered. The power headroom reporting process, if there is an allocated temporary cell - the wireless network temporary identity, the temporary cell - Temporary C-RNTI is translated.
其中对于重建 PDCP实体的上行链路, 按照上行数据传输重建过程对于 映射到 RLC-AM的 DRB、 映射到 RLC-UM的 DRB和 SRB分别执行相应的 操作。  For the uplink of the reconstructed PDCP entity, the DRB and the SRB mapped to the RLC-AM and the DRB and the SRB mapped to the RLC-UM are respectively performed according to the uplink data transmission and reconstruction process.
其中对于重建 RLC实体的上行链路, RLC重建中发送 RLC UM实体、 RLC AM实体的发送端相关的描述分别执行相应的操作。  For the uplink of the reconstructed RLC entity, the descriptions related to the sending end of the RLC UM entity and the RLC AM entity in the RLC re-establishment respectively perform corresponding operations.
上述复位 MAC的上行链路、 重建 PDCP实体的上行链路、 重建 RLC实 体的上行链路的过程适用于以下各实施例。  The above process of resetting the uplink of the MAC, reestablishing the uplink of the PDCP entity, and reconstructing the uplink of the RLC entity is applicable to the following embodiments.
可选的, 用户设备接收的所述切换命令中还可以携带指示标识, 所述指 示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载待切换的上行传 输的上行链路, 并保留与所述源基站之间的下行链路。 从而使得在切换过程 中用户设备和源基站之间的下行通信可以继续进行。  Optionally, the handover command that is received by the user equipment may further include an indication identifier, where the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying uplink transmissions to be switched, and The downlink with the source base station is reserved. Thereby, the downlink communication between the user equipment and the source base station can be continued during the handover.
进一步, 所述指示标识还可以用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新 建用于承载待切换的上行传输的上行链路, 并保留与所述源基站之间的下行 链路和上行链路。 从而使得在切换过程中用户设备和源基站之间的下行通信 和上行通信可以继续进行, 减少了业务延时或业务中断。  Further, the indication identifier may be further used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying uplink transmissions to be switched, and reserve downlink and uplink with the source base station. road. Therefore, the downlink communication and the uplink communication between the user equipment and the source base station can be continued during the handover process, which reduces service delay or service interruption.
可选的, 用户设备还可以将 PDCP 实体划分为上行 PDCP 实体和下行 PDCP实体, 上行 PDCP实体与目标基站提供的第一小区对应, 下行 PDCP 实体与源基站提供的第二小区对应。 类似的, 用户设备还可以将 RLC实体划 分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体,上行 RLC实体与目标基站提供的第一 小区对应, 下行 RLC实体与源基站提供的第二小区对应。 其中, 用户设备经 由第一小区与目标基站进行上行传输, 并经由第二小区与源基站进行下行传 输。 进一步而言, 源基站为宏基站, 目标基站为微基站。 从而在切换过程中 对上行 PDCP实体和下行 PDCP实体、上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体可以 分别重建和配置; 不需要对整个 PDCP实体和 RLC实体重建和配置, 可以 使未发生切换的上行传输或下行传输继续通信, 提高了切换效率和灵活性。 Optionally, the user equipment may further divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station. Similarly, the user equipment may further divide the RLC entity into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, where the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station. Wherein, the user equipment The first cell performs uplink transmission with the target base station, and performs downlink transmission with the source base station via the second cell. Further, the source base station is a macro base station, and the target base station is a micro base station. Therefore, the uplink PDCP entity and the downlink PDCP entity, the uplink RLC entity, and the downlink RLC entity may be separately reconstructed and configured in the handover process; the entire PDCP entity and the RLC entity need not be reconstructed and configured, and the uplink transmission or downlink without handover may be performed. The transmission continues to communicate, improving switching efficiency and flexibility.
本发明实施例提供的切换方法, 源基站将用户设备的上行传输或下行传 输切换至目标基站, 从而使用户设备的上行传输和下行传输中的一个由源基 站提供的小区服务, 另一个由目标基站提供的小区服务, 从而提高小区吞吐 量和频谱效率。 图 4为本发明提供的切换方法另一个实施例的流程图, 如图 4, 本实施 例针对上述方法实施例提供了源基站为微基站, 目标基站为宏基站的实施场 景下切换方法的具体过程, 该方法包括:  In the handover method provided by the embodiment of the present invention, the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station, so that one of the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the user equipment is served by the source base station, and the other is targeted by the target. The cell service provided by the base station, thereby improving cell throughput and spectrum efficiency. FIG. 4 is a flowchart of another embodiment of a handover method according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 4, the embodiment provides a specific method for switching in a scenario where the source base station is a micro base station and the target base station is a macro base station. Process, the method includes:
S401、 UE向啟基占发送测量才艮告 ( measurement report )。  S401. The UE sends a measurement report to the Kaiji.
S402、 微基站根据测量报告确定将 UE的下行传输从微基站切换至宏基 站的第一小区。  S402. The micro base station determines, according to the measurement report, that the downlink transmission of the UE is switched from the micro base station to the first cell of the macro base station.
举例来说, 微基站可以根据测量报告中包括的第一小区的公共参考信号 ( common reference signal, CRS )或信道状态信息参考信号 ( channel-State information reference signal , CSI-RS ) 的参考信号接收功率 ( reference signal receiving power, RSRP )测量结果大于 UE当前服务的微基站的第二 小区的 CRS或 CSI-RS的 RSRP测量结果, 或上述第一小区的测量结果超 过一定门限时, 确定将 UE的下行传输从微基站切换至宏基站的第一小区。  For example, the micro base station may receive power according to a reference signal of a common reference signal (CRS) or a channel-state information reference signal (CSI-RS) of the first cell included in the measurement report. The reference signal receiving power (RSRP) measurement result is greater than the RSRP measurement result of the CRS or CSI-RS of the second cell of the micro base station currently served by the UE, or when the measurement result of the first cell exceeds a certain threshold, determining the downlink of the UE The transmission is handed over from the micro base station to the first cell of the macro base station.
S403、微基站向宏基站发送切换请求,该切换请求中携带下行传输信息。 其中, 下行传输信息可以包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类型指 示。  S403. The micro base station sends a handover request to the macro base station, where the handover request carries downlink transmission information. The downlink transmission information may include a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover.
可选的, 下行传输信息还可以包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 E-RAB标识、 至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源 控制上下文信息, 其中无线资源控制上下文信息可以包含下行无线资源专用 配置信息和 /或用户设备的小区 -无线网络临时标识 C-RNTI信息。  Optionally, the downlink transmission information may further include one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, at least one E-RAB identifier corresponding to the E-RAB quality of service parameter, and radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control The context information may include downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identity C-RNTI information of the user equipment.
可以理解的是, 切换请求中还可以具有上行无线资源专用配置信息等, 在此不——列举。 It can be understood that the handover request may also have uplink radio resource dedicated configuration information, etc. Not here - enumeration.
5404、 宏基站执行无线接纳控制 (radio admission control, RAC )过 程, 允许将 UE的下行传输切换到宏基站提供的第一小区。  5404. The macro base station performs a radio admission control (RAC) process, and allows the downlink transmission of the UE to be switched to the first cell provided by the macro base station.
具体的, 上述接纳控制过程表示宏基站确认是否允许切换。 例如, 当宏 基站的负荷较高时, 宏基站可以拒绝切换请求。 上述接纳控制过程发生在随 机接入之前。 如果宏基站拒绝了切换请求, 则源基站需要选择其他基站进行 切换, 随机接入不会在这个宏基站发生。  Specifically, the above admission control process indicates that the macro base station confirms whether to allow handover. For example, when the load of the macro base station is high, the macro base station can reject the handover request. The admission control process described above occurs before random access. If the macro base station rejects the handover request, the source base station needs to select another base station to perform handover, and random access does not occur at the macro base station.
5405、 宏基站在第一小区为 UE分配下行资源。  S405. The macro base station allocates downlink resources to the UE in the first cell.
本实施例中, 上述在第一小区可以理解为第一小区对应的频段。 上述下 行资源可以理解为第一小区对应的下行资源。  In this embodiment, the foregoing first cell may be understood as a frequency band corresponding to the first cell. The foregoing downlink resource can be understood as a downlink resource corresponding to the first cell.
具体的, 宏基站可以为 UE分配 C-RNTI , 并根据各 E-RAB的服务质量 ( quality of service, QoS )参数配置下行资源。 或者宏基站可以根据 E-RAB 的 QoS参数配置下行资源和上行资源,但 UE可以仅使用下行资源配置信息。  Specifically, the macro base station may allocate a C-RNTI to the UE, and configure a downlink resource according to the quality of service (QoS) parameter of each E-RAB. Alternatively, the macro base station may configure the downlink resource and the uplink resource according to the QoS parameter of the E-RAB, but the UE may use only the downlink resource configuration information.
宏基站为 UE分配的下行资源可以包括以下一种或任意种组合: SRB下 行配置信息、 DRB下行配置信息、 MAC下行配置信息和 PDSCH配置信息。  The downlink resources allocated by the macro base station to the UE may include one or any combination of the following: SRB downlink configuration information, DRB downlink configuration information, MAC downlink configuration information, and PDSCH configuration information.
其中, 信令无线承载 (SRB ) 下行配置信息可以包括以下一种或任意种 组合: SRB标识, RLC下行配置, 逻辑信道标识配置信息等。 DRB下行配 置信息可以包括以下一种或任意种组合: 演进的分组系统承载标识, DRB标 识, PDCP下行配置, RLC下行配置, 逻辑信道标识配置信息等。 媒体接入 控制 (MAC ) 下行配置信息可以包括以下一种或任意种组合: 不连续接收配 置信息, SCell去激活定时器配置信息等。  The signaling radio bearer (SRB) downlink configuration information may include one or any combination of the following: an SRB identifier, an RLC downlink configuration, a logical channel identifier configuration information, and the like. The DRB downlink configuration information may include one or any combination of the following: an evolved packet system bearer identifier, a DRB identifier, a PDCP downlink configuration, an RLC downlink configuration, a logical channel identifier configuration information, and the like. The media access control (MAC) downlink configuration information may include one or any combination of the following: discontinuous reception of configuration information, SCell deactivation of timer configuration information, and the like.
可以理解的是, 宏基站为 UE分配的下行资源还可以包括以下一种或任 意种组合: 信道质量指示 (CQI )报告配置信息, 天线信息等。  It can be understood that the downlink resources allocated by the macro base station to the UE may further include one or any combination of the following: Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) report configuration information, antenna information, and the like.
另外, 宏基站可以不配置物理上行控制信道和物理上行共享信道资源, 或者,宏基站可以配置但不使用物理上行控制信道和物理上行共享信道资源。  In addition, the macro base station may not configure the physical uplink control channel and the physical uplink shared channel resource, or the macro base station may configure but not use the physical uplink control channel and the physical uplink shared channel resource.
5406、 宏基站向微基站发送切换响应, 切换响应中具有宏基站为 UE分 配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息。  5406. The macro base station sends a handover response to the micro base station, where the handover response has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the macro base station to the UE.
切换响应中还可以携带以下信息中的一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 E-RAB ID, 至少一个 E-RAB对应的下行通用分组无线服务(GPRS ) 隧道 协议端口 (DL GTP tunnel endpoint ), 宏基站到微基站透明容器等。 其中, 宏基站到微基站透明容器中包含切换命令(handover command , 即包含移动控制信息 ( mobility Control Info ) 的无线资源连接重配置消息 ( RRC connection reconfiguration ) ) 所需配置给 UE的无线资源参数。 The handover response may also carry one or any combination of the following information: at least one E-RAB ID, at least one E-RAB corresponding to a downlink general packet radio service (GPRS) tunneling protocol port (DL GTP tunnel endpoint), Acer Stand to the transparent base station of the micro base station. The macro base station to the micro base station transparent container includes a handover command, that is, a radio resource connection reconfiguration message (RRC connection reconfiguration) including mobility control information, and a radio resource parameter that is required to be configured to the UE.
5407、 微基站向 UE发送切换命令(handover command ), 该切换命令 中具有为 UE分配待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息。  5407. The micro base station sends a handover command to the UE, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched.
其中, 下行资源配置信息可以包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类 型指示。  The downlink resource configuration information may include a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover.
可选的, 切换命令中还可以具有指示标识, 指示标识可以用于指示用户 设备与宏基站新建用于承载待切换的下行传输的下行链路并保留与微基站之 间的下行链路和上行链路; 或者, 指示标识还可以用于指示用户设备与宏基 站新建用于承载待切换的下行传输的下行链路并删除与微基站之间的下行链 路; 或者, 指示标识还可以用于指示用户设备与宏基站新建用于承载待切换 的下行传输的下行链路并保留与微基站之间的上行链路。  Optionally, the handover command may further include an indication identifier, where the indication identifier may be used to indicate that the user equipment and the macro base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched, and reserve the downlink and uplink with the micro base station. The indication identifier may also be used to indicate that the user equipment and the macro base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched and delete the downlink between the micro base station; or, the indication identifier may also be used for The user equipment and the macro base station are instructed to newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be handed over and reserve an uplink with the micro base station.
5408、 微基站向宏基站发送下行分组数据汇聚协议服务数据单元 ( packet data convergence protocol service data unit, PDCP SDU ) ό々序歹 'J 号 (sequence number, SN )信息和转发未收到 RLC层确认的下行 PDCP SDU。  5408. The micro base station sends a packet data convergence protocol service data unit (PDCP SDU) to the macro base station, and the sequence number (SN) information is sent and the RLC layer is not received. Downstream PDCP SDU.
其中, 下行 PDCP SDU的序列号信息中可以包括至少一个下行 E-RAB 的 PDCP序列号信息,用于指示下行切换后宏基站将要给下行新 PDCP SDU 所分配的序列号。  The sequence number information of the downlink PDCP SDU may include at least one downlink E-RAB PDCP sequence number information, which is used to indicate the sequence number that the macro base station will allocate to the downlink new PDCP SDU after the downlink handover.
5409、 UE根据下行资源配置信息进行下行资源配置。  S409: The UE performs downlink resource configuration according to the downlink resource configuration information.
UE进行下行资源配置,具体可参见对应图 3的方法实施例,在此不再赘 述。  The UE performs downlink resource configuration. For details, refer to the method embodiment corresponding to FIG. 3, which is not described herein.
在本实施例中, UE接收到切换命令后, 在下行与宏基站同步。 具体资源 配置过程可参见对应图 3的方法实施例, 在此不再赘述。  In this embodiment, after receiving the handover command, the UE synchronizes with the macro base station in the downlink. For a specific resource configuration process, refer to the method embodiment corresponding to FIG. 3, and details are not described herein again.
作为一种可行的实施方式, UE对 MAC下行进行复位, 重建 PDCP实体 的下行, 重建 RLC实体的下行; 配置 PDCP实体的下行传输和 RLC实体的 下行传输对应的下行资源。  As a possible implementation manner, the UE resets the downlink of the MAC, reestablishes the downlink of the PDCP entity, and reconstructs the downlink of the RLC entity. The downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission of the PDCP entity and the downlink transmission of the RLC entity are configured.
作为另一种可行的实施方式, UE对 MAC下行进行复位, 重建 PDCP实 体的下行, 重建 RLC实体的下行; 配置 PDCP实体的上行传输和下行传输 对应的下行资源和上行资源,以及 RLC实体的上行传输和下行传输对应的下 行资源和上行资源。 As another possible implementation manner, the UE resets the downlink of the MAC, reestablishes the downlink of the PDCP entity, and reconstructs the downlink of the RLC entity; and configures the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the PDCP entity. Corresponding downlink resources and uplink resources, and downlink resources and uplink resources corresponding to uplink transmission and downlink transmission of the RLC entity.
在 S407中微基站向 UE发送切换命令的切换命令中具有的指示标识用 于指示用户设备与宏基站新建用于承载待切换的下行传输的下行链路并保留 用户设备与微基站之间的下行链路和上行链路的实施场景下, 则 UE不需要 对 MAC下行进行复位,保持既有的 PDCP实体下行和 RLC实体进行下行传 输, 即与微基站进行上下行传输的 PDCP实体和 RLC实体均不需要重建立 和重配置, 仅需建立并配置新增的与宏基站间的 PDCP实体和 RLC实体进 行下行传输所对应的下行资源, 及配置 MAC层下行传输参数。 上述 PDCP 实体和 RLC实体的重建和重配置涉及到 SRB和 DRB的重建和重配置。切换 过程中 UE与源基站和目标基站交互的示意图可以如图 7所示。  The indication identifier of the handover command sent by the micro base station to the UE in the S407 is used to indicate that the user equipment and the macro base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched and retain the downlink between the user equipment and the micro base station. In the scenario of the link and the uplink, the UE does not need to reset the MAC downlink, and keeps the downlink of the PDCP entity and the RLC entity for downlink transmission, that is, the PDCP entity and the RLC entity that perform uplink and downlink transmission with the micro base station. No need to re-establish and re-configure, only need to establish and configure the downlink resources corresponding to the downlink transmission between the PDCP entity and the RLC entity that are added to the macro base station, and configure the downlink transmission parameters of the MAC layer. The reconstruction and reconfiguration of the above PDCP entity and RLC entity involves reconstruction and reconfiguration of SRB and DRB. A schematic diagram of the UE interacting with the source base station and the target base station during handover may be as shown in FIG. 7.
此外, UE还可以进行物理下行共享信道等配置。  In addition, the UE may also perform configuration such as a physical downlink shared channel.
可选的, 用户设备可以将 PDCP 实体划分为上行 PDCP 实体和下行 PDCP实体, 上行 PDCP实体与源基站提供的第二小区对应, 下行 PDCP实 体与目标基站提供的第一小区对应。  Optionally, the user equipment may divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station.
类似的, 用户设备还可以将 RLC实体划分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC 实体, 上行 RLC实体与源基站提供的第二小区对应, 下行 RLC实体与目标 基站提供的第一小区对应。  Similarly, the user equipment may further divide the RLC entity into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, where the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station.
具体的, 如图 5所示, UE的 PDCP实体可以分离为上行 PDCP实体和 下行 PDCP实体(分别对应于第二小区和第一小区), UE的 RLC AM实体可 以分离为上行 RLC AM实体和下行 RLC AM实体两部分(分别对应于第二小 区和第一小区), UE的 RLC UM实体分离为下行 RLC UM实体和上行 RLC UM实体两部分(分别对应于第二小区和第一小区)。  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the PDCP entity of the UE may be separated into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity (corresponding to the second cell and the first cell, respectively), and the RLC AM entity of the UE may be separated into an uplink RLC AM entity and a downlink. The RLC AM entity is two parts (corresponding to the second cell and the first cell, respectively), and the RLC UM entity of the UE is separated into two parts, a downlink RLC UM entity and an uplink RLC UM entity (corresponding to the second cell and the first cell, respectively).
需要说明的是, 在 UE执行上述配置的过程中, 上行 PDCP实体、 上行 RLC实体不进行重建和重配置, MAC上行不进行复位等操作, 因此, UE与 微基站的上行通信过程得以继续进行。  It should be noted that, in the process of performing the foregoing configuration, the uplink PDCP entity and the uplink RLC entity do not perform reconfiguration and reconfiguration, and the MAC uplink does not perform operations such as resetting. Therefore, the uplink communication process between the UE and the micro base station can be continued.
其中, 对 S408和 S409的执行顺序不分先后, 两者还可以同时进行。 S410、 UE 向微基站发送无线资源重配置完成 ( RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete ) 消息。  The execution order of S408 and S409 is in no particular order, and the two can also be performed simultaneously. S410. The UE sends a radio resource reconfiguration complete (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) message to the micro base station.
由于上行链路保持在源基站, 因此, UE不向目标基站发送无线资源重配 置完成消息, 而是向源基站发送无线资源重配置完成消息。 Since the uplink remains at the source base station, the UE does not send radio resource reconfiguration to the target base station. The completion message is sent, and a radio resource reconfiguration complete message is sent to the source base station.
S411、 啟基站向宏基站发送下行切换完成。  S411. The base station sends a downlink handover completion to the macro base station.
切换成功后, 可以由源基站确定是否删除源基站到 UE的下行无线链路。 若源基站删除源基站到 UE的下行无线链路, 则小区切换后 UE与源基站和 目标基站交互的示意图可以如图 6所示, 若源基站不删除源基站到 UE的下 行无线链路,则小区切换后 UE与源基站和目标基站交互的示意图可以如图 7 所示。  After the handover is successful, the source base station may determine whether to delete the downlink radio link from the source base station to the UE. If the source base station deletes the downlink radio link from the source base station to the UE, the schematic diagram of the UE interacting with the source base station and the target base station after the cell handover may be as shown in FIG. 6. If the source base station does not delete the downlink radio link from the source base station to the UE, The schematic diagram of the UE interacting with the source base station and the target base station after the cell handover may be as shown in FIG. 7.
本实施例提供的切换方法, 可以适用于各种异构网场景, 如图 8所示, 一种实施场景可以为: 宏基站所提供的宏小区 (macro cell )和低功率节点 ( LPN )提供的微小区 (pico cell )热点覆盖。 其中, Pico cell可以配置小区 范围扩展(cell range extension, CRE )或者不配置 CRE, 配置 CRE时偏 移(bias )配置可以为 6dB或 9dB或更高。 宏基站提供的第一小区与微基站 提供的第二小区可以具有不同的物理小区标识( PCI )或相同的物理小区标识。 对于在宏基站和微基站边缘的 UE,可以釆用增强的干扰协调( enhanced Inter cell interference coordination , elCIC )或者 CoMP技术降低干扰。 对于微基 站中心区域与微基站有 RRC连接处于 RRC连接状态的 UE, 从微基站中心 区域向宏基站移动到达微基站的 CRE范围时,则微基站可以确定将 UE的下 行传输切换到宏基站。  The handover method provided in this embodiment may be applicable to various heterogeneous network scenarios. As shown in FIG. 8, an implementation scenario may be: a macro cell and a low power node (LPN) provided by the macro base station. The pico cell is covered by hotspots. The Pico cell can be configured with a cell range extension (CRE) or no CRE. When the CRE is configured, the bias configuration can be 6dB or 9dB or higher. The first cell provided by the macro base station and the second cell provided by the micro base station may have different physical cell identifiers (PCIs) or the same physical cell identifier. For UEs at the edge of the macro base station and the micro base station, enhanced interference coordination (elCIC) or CoMP technology can be used to reduce interference. When the UE having the RRC connection in the central area of the micro base station and the micro base station is in the RRC connection state, when moving from the central area of the micro base station to the macro base station to reach the CRE range of the micro base station, the micro base station may determine to switch the downlink transmission of the UE to the macro base station.
本实施例提供的切换方法, 还可以适用于异构网载波聚合 (carrier aggregation, CA )场景, 例如, 宏基站和微基站分别提供 f1和 f2两个频率, 在宏基站和微基站共同覆盖区域的 UE聚合了宏基站提供的 Π和微基站提供 的 f2。微基站可以在 f2配置 CRE或者不配置 CRE,配置 CRE时偏移( bias ) 配置可以为 6dB或 9dB或更高。  The handover method provided in this embodiment may also be applicable to a carrier aggregation (CA) scenario. For example, the macro base station and the micro base station provide two frequencies f1 and f2, respectively, and the macro base station and the micro base station jointly cover the area. The UE aggregates the f2 provided by the macro base station and the micro base station. The micro base station can configure CRE or not CRE in f2, and the offset configuration can be 6dB or 9dB or higher when configuring CRE.
另外, 需要说明的是, 对于宏基站提供的宏小区与微基站提供的微小区 边缘的 UE, UE在下行与宏小区建立无线链路, 在上行与微小区建立无线链 路, 在下行与宏小区通信, 在上行与微小区通信。 如果 UE向宏基站移动而 移出 CRE范围进入仅宏基站的覆盖范围时,则微基站可以将 UE的上行传输 切换到宏基站, 从而 UE的上行和下行均与宏基站进行通信。 源基站为微基 站, 切换的目标基站为宏基站, UE可以把下行 PDCP实体和上行 PDCP实 体合并为一个双向 PDCP实体, 同样,可以将下行 RLC AM实体和上行 RLC AM实体合并为一个双向 RLC AM实体。 将 UE的上行传输切换到宏基站的 过程与 S401 -S411的过程相类似, 在此不再赘述。 In addition, it should be noted that, for the macro cell provided by the macro base station and the micro cell edge provided by the micro base station, the UE establishes a radio link with the macro cell in the downlink, and establishes a radio link in the uplink and the micro cell, in the downlink and the macro. Cell communication, communicating with the micro cell in the uplink. If the UE moves to the macro base station and moves out of the CRE range to enter the coverage of only the macro base station, the micro base station can switch the uplink transmission of the UE to the macro base station, so that both the uplink and the downlink of the UE communicate with the macro base station. The source base station is a micro base station, and the target base station for handover is a macro base station, and the UE may combine the downlink PDCP entity and the uplink PDCP entity into one bidirectional PDCP entity. Similarly, the downlink RLC AM entity and the uplink RLC may be used. The AM entities are combined into one bidirectional RLC AM entity. The process of switching the uplink transmission of the UE to the macro base station is similar to the process of S401-S411, and details are not described herein again.
本发明实施例提供的切换方法, 源基站将用户设备的上行传输或下行传 输切换至目标基站, 从而使用户设备的上行传输和下行传输中的一个由源基 站提供的小区服务, 另一个由目标基站提供的小区服务, 可以实现用户设备 以较低的功率向微基站发送上行数据, 并且宏基站可以以较强的发射功率向 用户设备发送下行数据, 从而提高小区吞吐量和频谱效率。 图 9为本发明提供的切换方法另一个实施例的流程图, 如图 9, 相对于 上述各方法实施例而言, 本实施例提供了源基站为宏基站, 目标基站为微基 站的实施场景下切换方法的具体过程, 该方法包括:  In the handover method provided by the embodiment of the present invention, the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station, so that one of the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the user equipment is served by the source base station, and the other is targeted by the target. The cell service provided by the base station can enable the user equipment to send uplink data to the micro base station with a lower power, and the macro base station can send downlink data to the user equipment with a stronger transmission power, thereby improving cell throughput and spectrum efficiency. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of another embodiment of a handover method according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 9, with respect to the foregoing method embodiments, the embodiment provides a scenario in which a source base station is a macro base station, and a target base station is a micro base station. The specific process of switching the method, the method includes:
S901、 UE向宏基占发送测量才艮告 ( measurement report )。  S901: The UE sends a measurement report to the Acer account.
5902、 宏基站根据测量报告确定将 UE的上行传输从宏基站切换到微基 站的第一小区。  5902. The macro base station determines, according to the measurement report, that the uplink transmission of the UE is switched from the macro base station to the first cell of the micro base station.
举例来说, 宏基站可以根据微基站的 CRS 或 CSI-RS 的下行路损 For example, the macro base station may be based on the downlink path loss of the CRS or CSI-RS of the micro base station.
( downlink pathloss )测量结果大于宏基站的 CRS或 CSI-RS的下行路损 ( downlink pathloss )测量结果, 或微基站的 CRS或 CSI-RS的下行路损 ( downlink pathloss )测量结果超过一定门限, 确定将 UE的上行传输从微 基站切换至微基站的第一小区; 宏基站可以根据 UE 报告的功率余量报告 ( power headroom , PHR ) 或者 UE 的上行路损测量或者探测参考信号 ( sounding reference signal , SRS )测量等方式估算 UE的下行路损。 The downlink pathloss measurement result is greater than the downlink pathloss measurement result of the CRS or CSI-RS of the macro base station, or the downlink path loss measurement result of the CRS or CSI-RS of the micro base station exceeds a certain threshold, and is determined. The uplink transmission of the UE is switched from the micro base station to the first cell of the micro base station; the macro base station may be based on the power headroom (PHR) reported by the UE or the uplink path loss measurement or sounding reference signal of the UE. The downlink path loss of the UE is estimated by means of measurement or the like.
5903、宏基站向微基站发送切换请求,该切换请求中具有上行传输信息。 其中, 上行传输信息可以包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指 示。  S903: The macro base station sends a handover request to the micro base station, where the handover request has uplink transmission information. The uplink transmission information may include a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
可选的, 上行传输信息还可以包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 Optionally, the uplink transmission information may also include one or any combination of the following: at least one
E-RAB标识、 至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源 控制上下文信息, 其中无线资源控制上下文信息可以包含: 上行无线资源专 用配置信息和 /或用户设备的小区 -无线网络临时标识 C-RNTI信息。 The E-RAB identifier, the E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and the radio resource control context information, where the radio resource control context information may include: uplink radio resource specific configuration information and/or user equipment cell-wireless The network temporarily identifies the C-RNTI information.
可以理解的是, 切换请求中还可以具有下行无线资源专用配置信息等, 在此不——列举。 5904、 微基站执行接纳控制过程, 允许将 UE的上行传输切换到微基站 的第一小区。 It can be understood that the handover request may also have downlink radio resource specific configuration information and the like, which are not enumerated here. 5904. The micro base station performs an admission control process, and allows the uplink transmission of the UE to be switched to the first cell of the micro base station.
5905、 啟基站在第一小区为 UE分配上行资源。  S905: The base station allocates uplink resources to the UE in the first cell.
具体的,微基站可以为 UE分配 C-RNTI , 并根据各 E-RAB的 QoS参数 配置上行资源。 或者微基站可以根据 E-RAB 的 QoS参数配置下行资源和上 行资源, 但 UE可以仅使用上行资源配置信息。  Specifically, the micro base station may allocate a C-RNTI to the UE, and configure an uplink resource according to the QoS parameters of each E-RAB. Alternatively, the micro base station may configure the downlink resource and the uplink resource according to the QoS parameter of the E-RAB, but the UE may use only the uplink resource configuration information.
微基站为 UE分配的上行资源可以包括以下一种或任意种组合: SRB上 行配置信息、 DRB上行配置信息、 MAC上行配置信息和 PDSCH配置信息。  The uplink resources allocated by the micro base station to the UE may include one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink configuration information, DRB uplink configuration information, MAC uplink configuration information, and PDSCH configuration information.
其中, 信令无线承载 (SRB )上行配置信息可以包括以下一种或任意种 组合: SRB标识, RLC上行配置,逻辑信道标识,逻辑信道上行配置信息等。 DRB上行配置信息可以包括以下一种或任意种组合: 演进的分组系统承载标 识, DRB标识, PDCP上行配置, RLC上行配置, 逻辑信道标识, 逻辑信道 上行配置信息等。 MAC上行配置信息可以包括以下一种或任意种组合: 上行 共享传输信道(UL-SCH ) 配置信息, 时间调整定时器配置信息, 功率余量 报告配置信息等。  The signaling radio bearer (SRB) uplink configuration information may include one or any combination of the following: an SRB identifier, an RLC uplink configuration, a logical channel identifier, and a logical channel uplink configuration information. The DRB uplink configuration information may include one or any combination of the following: an evolved packet system bearer identifier, a DRB identifier, a PDCP uplink configuration, an RLC uplink configuration, a logical channel identifier, a logical channel uplink configuration information, and the like. The MAC uplink configuration information may include one or any combination of the following: uplink shared transport channel (UL-SCH) configuration information, time adjustment timer configuration information, power headroom report configuration information, and the like.
可以理解的是, 微基站为 UE分配的上行资源还可以包括以下一种或任 意种组合: 上行物理共享信道, 上行物理控制信道, 上行功率控制参数, 探 测参考信号参数( SRS ), 天线信息等。  It can be understood that the uplink resource allocated by the micro base station to the UE may further include one or any combination of the following: an uplink physical shared channel, an uplink physical control channel, an uplink power control parameter, a sounding reference signal parameter (SRS), an antenna information, and the like. .
另外, 啟基站可以不配置物理下行控制信道和物理下行共享信道资源, 或者,微基站可以配置但不使用物理下行控制信道和物理下行共享信道资源。  In addition, the base station may not configure the physical downlink control channel and the physical downlink shared channel resource, or the micro base station may configure but not use the physical downlink control channel and the physical downlink shared channel resource.
5906、 微基站向宏基站发送切换响应, 切换响应中具有微基站为 UE分 配的待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源配置信息。  5906. The micro base station sends a handover response to the macro base station, where the handover response has uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched allocated by the micro base station to the UE.
切换响应消息中还可以携带以下信息中的一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 E-RAB ID, 至少一个 E-RAB对应的上行通用分组无线服务(GPRS ) 隧道 协议端口( UL GTP tunnel endpoint ),微基站到宏基站透明容器( transparent contaiinsr ) 。  The handover response message may further carry one or any combination of the following information: at least one E-RAB ID, at least one E-RAB corresponding to an uplink general packet radio service (GPRS) tunneling protocol port (UL GTP tunnel endpoint), Micro base station to transparent base station transparent container (transparent contaiinsr).
其中, 微基站到宏基站透明容器包含切换命令 ( handover command ), 例如, 移动控制信息的无线资源连接重配置消息包含需要配置给 UE的无线 资源参数。  The micro base station to the macro base station transparent container includes a handover command. For example, the radio resource connection reconfiguration message of the mobility control information includes a radio resource parameter that needs to be configured to the UE.
S907、 宏基站向 UE发送切换命令 ( handover command ), 该切换命令 中具有微基站为 UE分配的待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源配置信息。 其中, 上行资源配置信息可以包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类 型指示。 S907. The macro base station sends a handover command to the UE, where the handover command is sent. The uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched allocated by the micro base station to the UE is included. The uplink resource configuration information may include a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
可选的, 切换命令中还可以携带指示标识, 指示标识可以用于指示用户 设备与微基站新建用于承载待切换的上行传输的上行链路并保留用户设备与 宏基站之间的上行链路和下行链路; 或者, 指示标识还可以用于指示用户设 备与宏基站新建用于承载待切换的上行传输的上行链路并删除用户设备与微 基站之间的上行链路; 或者, 指示标识还可以用于指示用户设备与微基站新 建用于承载待切换的上行传输的上行链路并保留与宏基站之间的下行链路。  Optionally, the handover command may further include an indication identifier, where the indication identifier may be used to indicate that the user equipment and the micro base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched, and reserve an uplink between the user equipment and the macro base station. And indicating that the user equipment and the macro base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched and deleting the uplink between the user equipment and the micro base station; or It can also be used to indicate that the user equipment and the micro base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be handed over and reserve the downlink between the macro base station and the macro base station.
S908、 宏基站向微基站发送上行 PDCP SDU的序列号( SN )信息和转 发成功接收到的上行 PDCP SDU。  S908: The macro base station sends the sequence number (SN) information of the uplink PDCP SDU to the micro base station and forwards the successfully received uplink PDCP SDU.
其中,上行 PDCP SDU的序列号信息可以包括第一个丟失的上行 PDCP SDU的序列号。  The sequence number information of the uplink PDCP SDU may include the sequence number of the first lost uplink PDCP SDU.
S909、 UE根据上行资源配置信息进行上行资源配置。  S909. The UE performs uplink resource configuration according to the uplink resource configuration information.
UE进行上行资源配置具体可参见图 3实施例的描述, 在此不再赘述。 具体的: UE接收到切换命令后, 在上行与微基站同步。 例如, 可以通过 随机接入过程或者微基站直接给 UE发送上行定时提前值实现同步。  For details about the uplink resource configuration of the UE, refer to the description of the embodiment in FIG. 3, and details are not described herein again. Specifically: after receiving the handover command, the UE synchronizes with the micro base station in the uplink. For example, the uplink timing advance value may be directly sent to the UE through the random access procedure or the micro base station to achieve synchronization.
作为一种可行的实施方式, UE对 MAC上行进行复位, 重建 PDCP实体 的上行, 重建 RLC实体的上行; 配置 PDCP实体的上行传输和 RLC实体的 上行传输对应的上行资源。  As a possible implementation manner, the UE resets the MAC uplink, reestablishes the uplink of the PDCP entity, and reconstructs the uplink of the RLC entity. The uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission of the PDCP entity and the uplink transmission of the RLC entity are configured.
作为另一种可行的实施方式, UE对 MAC上行进行复位, 重建 PDCP实 体的上行, 重建 RLC实体的上行; 配置 PDCP实体的上行传输和下行传输 对应的上行资源和下行资源,以及 RLC实体的上行传输和下行传输对应的上 行资源和下行资源。  As another possible implementation manner, the UE resets the MAC uplink, reestablishes the uplink of the PDCP entity, and reestablishes the uplink of the RLC entity; configures the uplink and downlink resources corresponding to the uplink and downlink transmissions of the PDCP entity, and the uplink of the RLC entity. Uplink resources and downlink resources corresponding to transmission and downlink transmission.
在 S907中宏基站向 UE发送切换命令的切换命令中携带的指示标识用 于指示用户设备与微基站新建用于承载待切换的上行传输的上行链路, 并保 留用户设备与宏基站之间的下行链路和上行链路的实施场景下, UE不需要对 MAC上行进行复位,原来的 SRB和 DRB的 PDCP实体上行和 RLC实体上 行, 即与宏基站进行上下行传输的 SRB和 DRB的 PDCP实体上行和 RLC 实体上行均不需要重建立和重配置, 仅需建立并配置新增的 SRB和 DRB的 PDCP实体和 RLC实体上行传输对应的上行资源, 配置 MAC层上行传输参 数。 切换过程中 UE与源基站和目标基站交互的示意图可以如图 11所示。 The indication identifier carried in the handover command of the macro base station transmitting the handover command to the UE in S907 is used to indicate that the user equipment and the micro base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched, and retain the between the user equipment and the macro base station. In the scenario of the downlink and the uplink, the UE does not need to reset the MAC uplink, and the PDCP entity of the original SRB and the DRB is uplinked and the RLC entity is uplinked, that is, the PDCP entity of the SRB and the DRB that performs uplink and downlink transmission with the macro base station. Uplink and RLC entity uplinks do not need to be re-established and reconfigured. Only new SRBs and DRBs need to be established and configured. The PDCP entity and the RLC entity uplink transmit corresponding uplink resources, and configure MAC layer uplink transmission parameters. A schematic diagram of the UE interacting with the source base station and the target base station during handover may be as shown in FIG.
此外, UE还可以进行物理上行共享信道等配置。  In addition, the UE can also perform configuration such as a physical uplink shared channel.
可选的, 用户设备可以将 PDCP 实体划分为上行 PDCP 实体和下行 PDCP实体, 下行 PDCP实体与源基站提供的第二小区对应, 上行 PDCP实 体与目标基站提供的第一小区对应。  Optionally, the user equipment may divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, where the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station.
类似的, 用户设备还可以将 RLC实体划分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC 实体, 下行 RLC实体与源基站提供的第二小区对应, 上行 RLC实体与目标 基站提供的第一小区对应。 需要说明的是, 在 UE执行上述配置的过程中, 由于下行 PDCP实体、 下行 RLC实体不进行重建和重配置, MAC下行不进 行复位等操作, 因此, UE与微基站之间的下行通信过程得以继续进行。  Similarly, the user equipment may further divide the RLC entity into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, where the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station. It should be noted that, in the process of performing the foregoing configuration, the downlink downlink operation process between the UE and the micro base station can be performed because the downlink downlink PDCP entity and the downlink RLC entity do not perform reconstruction and reconfiguration, and the MAC downlink does not perform operations such as resetting. keep going.
其中, 对 S908和 S909的执行顺序不分先后, 两者还可以同时进行。 Among them, the execution order of S908 and S909 is in no particular order, and the two can also be performed simultaneously.
5910、 UE 向微基站发送无线资源重配置完成 ( RRC connection reconfiguration complete ) 消息。 5910. The UE sends a radio resource reconfiguration complete (RRC connection reconfiguration complete) message to the micro base station.
由于上行链路切换到目标基站, 因此, UE向目标基站发送无线资源重配 置完成消息。  Since the uplink is handed over to the target base station, the UE transmits a radio resource reconfiguration complete message to the target base station.
5911、 宏基站向微基站发送上行切换完成。  5911. The macro base station sends an uplink handover completion to the micro base station.
本实施例提供的切换方法, 同样适用于各种异构网场景, 与图 4所示的 实施例提供的异构网场景相类似, 在此不再赘述。 需要说明的是, 图 1 -图 9提供的上述实施例中, 用户设备处于 RRC连 接状态( RRC_connected ), 在切换前与源基站有 RRC连接。 或者, 用户设 备可以处于空闲状态 (RRCJdle ), 在这种实施场景下, 用户设备可以向宏 基站和微基站中的一个发起随机接入请求,以与宏基站或微基站建立 RRC连 接。对于位于宏基站提供的宏小区( macro cell )与微基站提供的微小区( pico cell )边缘并处于 RRCJdle状态的 UE, UE可以选择 macro cell或 pico cell 执行随机接入过程进入 RRC_Connected状态。 如果 UE先接入宏基站, 则 作为源基站的宏基站可以根据 UE的测量报告确定将 UE的上行传输切换到 微基站, 即, 执行图 9所示实施例的切换过程。 如果 UE先接入微基站, 则 作为源基站的微基站可以根据 UE的测量报告确定将 UE的下行传输切换到 宏基站, 即, 执行图 4所示实施例的切换过程。 The switching method provided in this embodiment is similar to the heterogeneous network scenario provided in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, and is not described here. It should be noted that, in the foregoing embodiment provided in FIG. 1 to FIG. 9, the user equipment is in an RRC connected state (RRC_connected), and has an RRC connection with the source base station before the handover. Alternatively, the user equipment may be in an idle state (RRCJdle). In this implementation scenario, the user equipment may initiate a random access request to one of the macro base station and the micro base station to establish an RRC connection with the macro base station or the micro base station. For a UE that is located in the macro cell of the macro base station and the pico cell edge provided by the micro base station and is in the RRC Jdle state, the UE may select the macro cell or the pico cell to perform a random access procedure to enter the RRC_Connected state. If the UE first accesses the macro base station, the macro base station as the source base station may determine to switch the uplink transmission of the UE to the micro base station according to the measurement report of the UE, that is, perform the handover procedure of the embodiment shown in FIG. If the UE accesses the micro base station first, the micro base station as the source base station may determine to switch the downlink transmission of the UE to the UE according to the measurement report of the UE. The macro base station, i.e., performs the handover procedure of the embodiment shown in FIG.
另外, 需要说明的是, 对于宏基站提供的宏小区与微基站提供的微小区 边缘的 UE, UE在下行与宏小区建立无线链路, 在上行与微小区建立无线链 路, 在下行与宏小区通信, 在上行与微小区通信。 如果 UE向微基站移动而 移出 CRE范围进入仅微基站的覆盖范围时,则宏基站可以将 UE的下行传输 切换到微基站, 从而 UE的上行和下行均与微基站进行通信。 源基站为宏基 站, 切换的目标基站为微基站, UE可以把下行 PDCP实体和上行 PDCP实 体合并为一个双向 PDCP实体, 同样,可以将下行 RLC AM实体和上行 RLC AM实体合并为一个双向 RLC AM实体。 将 UE的下行传输切换到微基站的 过程与 S901 -S911的过程相类似, 在此不再赘述。  In addition, it should be noted that, for the macro cell provided by the macro base station and the micro cell edge provided by the micro base station, the UE establishes a radio link with the macro cell in the downlink, and establishes a radio link in the uplink and the micro cell, in the downlink and the macro. Cell communication, communicating with the micro cell in the uplink. If the UE moves to the micro base station and moves out of the CRE range to enter the coverage of only the micro base station, the macro base station can switch the downlink transmission of the UE to the micro base station, so that both the uplink and the downlink of the UE communicate with the micro base station. The source base station is a macro base station, and the target base station for handover is a micro base station. The UE can combine the downlink PDCP entity and the uplink PDCP entity into one bidirectional PDCP entity. Similarly, the downlink RLC AM entity and the uplink RLC AM entity can be combined into one bidirectional RLC AM. entity. The process of switching the downlink transmission of the UE to the micro base station is similar to the process of S901-S911, and details are not described herein again.
切换成功后, 可以由源基站确定是否删除源基站到 UE的上行无线链路。 若源基站删除源基站到 UE的上行无线链路, 则小区切换后 UE与源基站和 目标基站交互的示意图可以如图 10所示,若源基站不删除源基站到 UE的上 行无线链路, 则小区切换后 UE与源基站和目标基站交互的示意图可以如图 11所示。  After the handover is successful, the source base station may determine whether to delete the uplink radio link from the source base station to the UE. If the source base station deletes the uplink radio link from the source base station to the UE, the schematic diagram of the UE interacting with the source base station and the target base station after the cell handover may be as shown in FIG. 10, if the source base station does not delete the uplink radio link from the source base station to the UE, The schematic diagram of the UE interacting with the source base station and the target base station after the cell handover may be as shown in FIG. 11.
在图 4和图 9所示实施例中, 对于位于宏基站提供的宏小区内与微基站 提供的微小区边缘的 UE, UE在下行与宏小区建立无线链路, 在上行与微小 区建立无线链路, 在下行与宏小区通信, 在上行与微小区通信的实施场景下, 用户设备的 DRB可以分别通过宏基站和微基站在与核心网 SGW的 S1-U接 口上与 S1 承载(S1 bearer )建立映射关系, 演进的无线接入承载 E-RAB 是 UE和 SGW之间的承载, 包括 UE和基站之间的数据无线承载 DRB和基 站与 SGW间的 S1 bearer两段, DRB和 S1 bearer——对应, 从而建立了 UE和 SGW之间的数据链路,如图 12所示。建立映射的过程简要描述如下: 移动管理实体 ( mobility management entity, MME )和 eNB建立 S1接口时 建立 E-RAB, 包含 E-RAB标识信息; eNB为 UE配置无线资源时, 在增加 DRB的信息中包含 E-RAB标识, 为 DRB分配 DRB标识, 从而在 DRB和 S1 bearer之间建立映射关系。或者,还可以通过宏基站与微基站中的一个作 为代理, 在与核心网 SGW的 S1-U接口上与 S1 bearer建立映射关系, 宏基 站与 基站通过交互 E-RAB标识和 DRB标识信息建立上述映射关系, 如图 13所示。 本发明实施例提供的切换方法, 源基站将用户设备的上行传输或下行传 输切换至目标基站, 从而使用户设备的上行传输和下行传输中的一个由源基 站提供的小区服务, 另一个由目标基站提供的小区服务, 可以实现用户设备 以较低的功率向微基站发送上行数据, 并且宏基站可以以较强的发射功率向 用户设备发送下行数据, 从而提高小区吞吐量和频谱效率。 图 14为本发明提供的基站一个实施例的结构示意图,该基站可以执行本 发明任意实施例的方法, 该基站例如是源基站、 或者其他类似的具有跨站协 调功能的设备; 如图 14所示, 该基站包括: 确定单元 11和发送单元 12; 确定单元 11 , 用于确定将用户设备的下行传输切换至第一小区或者将用 户设备的上行传输切换至第一小区; In the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 9, for the UE located in the macro cell provided by the macro base station and the micro cell edge provided by the micro base station, the UE establishes a radio link with the macro cell in the downlink, and establishes a wireless connection between the uplink and the micro cell. The link is in the downlink and communicates with the macro cell. In the implementation scenario of the uplink and the micro cell communication, the DRB of the user equipment can be carried by the macro base station and the micro base station on the S1-U interface with the core network SGW and the S1 bearer (S1 bearer) Establishing a mapping relationship, the evolved radio access bearer E-RAB is a bearer between the UE and the SGW, including a data radio bearer DRB between the UE and the base station, and an S1 bearer between the base station and the SGW, DRB and S1 bearer— - Correspondence, thereby establishing a data link between the UE and the SGW, as shown in FIG. The process of establishing the mapping is briefly described as follows: The mobility management entity (MME) and the eNB establish an E-RAB when the S1 interface is established, and include the E-RAB identification information. When the eNB configures the radio resource for the UE, the eNB adds the information of the DRB. The E-RAB identifier is included, and the DRB identifier is assigned to the DRB, so that a mapping relationship is established between the DRB and the S1 bearer. Alternatively, the mapping between the S1 bearer and the S1 bearer may be established on the S1-U interface with the core network SGW by using one of the macro base station and the micro base station, and the macro base station and the base station establish the foregoing by interacting with the E-RAB identifier and the DRB identification information. The mapping relationship is as shown in Figure 13. In the handover method provided by the embodiment of the present invention, the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station, so that one of the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the user equipment is served by the source base station, and the other is targeted by the target. The cell service provided by the base station can enable the user equipment to send uplink data to the micro base station with a lower power, and the macro base station can send downlink data to the user equipment with a stronger transmission power, thereby improving cell throughput and spectrum efficiency. FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a base station according to the present invention. The base station may perform a method according to any embodiment of the present invention, where the base station is, for example, a source base station or other similar device with cross-station coordination function; The base station includes: a determining unit 11 and a sending unit 12; the determining unit 11 is configured to determine to switch downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell or switch uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell;
发送单元 12, 用于向第一小区对应的目标基站发送切换请求, 切换请求 具有用户设备待切换的下行传输信息或上行传输信息;  The sending unit 12 is configured to send a handover request to the target base station corresponding to the first cell, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
发送单元 12还用于, 向用户设备发送切换命令 ,切换命令具有为用户设 备分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输 对应的上行资源配置信息, 以便切换后用户设备保持与基站的上行传输且经 由目标基站进行下行传输, 或切换后用户设备保持与基站间的下行传输且经 由目标基站进行上行传输;  The sending unit 12 is further configured to send, to the user equipment, a handover command, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated for the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so that the user after the handover The device maintains uplink transmission with the base station and performs downlink transmission via the target base station, or the user equipment maintains downlink transmission with the base station after handover and performs uplink transmission via the target base station;
其中, 下行传输信息和下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切 换的切换类型指示, 或, 上行传输信息和上行资源配置信息包括用于指示进 行上行传输切换的切换类型指示。  The downlink transmission information and the downlink resource configuration information include a handover type indication for indicating downlink transmission switching, or the uplink transmission information and the uplink resource configuration information include a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
可选的, 确定单元 11可以具体用于: 当基站为微基站, 目标基站为宏基 站时, 确定将用户设备的下行传输切换至由宏基站提供服务的第一小区; 或 者, 当基站为宏基站, 目标基站为微基站时, 确定将用户设备的上行传输切 换至由微基站提供服务的第一小区。  Optionally, the determining unit 11 may be specifically configured to: when the base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station, determine to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell served by the macro base station; or, when the base station is the Acer base station When the target base station is a micro base station, it is determined to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell served by the micro base station.
可选的, 当基站为微基站, 且目标基站为宏基站时, 第一小区覆盖切换 前向用户设备提供服务的基站对应的小区, 或宏基站与微基站提供的频率有 重叠;  Optionally, when the base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station, the first cell covers a cell corresponding to the base station that provides the service to the user equipment before the handover, or the frequency provided by the macro base station and the micro base station overlap;
当基站为宏基站, 且目标基站为微基站时, 切换前向用户设备提供服务 的基站对应的小区覆盖第一小区, 或宏基站与微基站提供的频率有重叠。 可选的,发送单元 12还可以用于: 向目标基站发送无线资源分配请求消 息, 分配请求消息用于目标基站在第一小区中为用户设备分配待切换的下行 传输对应的下行资源或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源。 When the base station is a macro base station, and the target base station is a micro base station, the cell corresponding to the base station that provides the service to the user equipment before the handover covers the first cell, or the frequency provided by the macro base station and the micro base station overlap. Optionally, the sending unit 12 is further configured to: send a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station, where the allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate, to the user equipment, the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched in the first cell or to be switched. The uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission.
可选的,发送单元 12还可以用于: 向用户设备发送媒体接入控制层控制 单元 MAC CE, MAC CE用于指示是否允许上行传输和下行传输分离。  Optionally, the sending unit 12 is further configured to: send a media access control layer control unit MAC CE to the user equipment, where the MAC CE is used to indicate whether to allow uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation.
可选的, 下行传输信息还包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个演进的 无线接入承载 E-RAB标识、至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参 数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 下行 无线资源专用配置信息和 /或用户终端的小区 -无线网络临时标识 C-RNTI 信 息;  Optionally, the downlink transmission information further includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identifier, at least one E-RAB identifier corresponding E-RAB QoS parameter, and radio resource control context information. The radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource dedicated configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI information of the user terminal;
上行传输信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 E-RAB标识、 至少 一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 上行无线资源专用配置信息和 /或用户 终端的 C-RNTI信息。  The uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, an E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; where the radio resource control context information includes: Radio resource specific configuration information and/or C-RNTI information of the user terminal.
可选的, 为用户设备分配的下行资源配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组 合: 信令无线承载 SRB下行配置信息、 数据无线承载 DRB下行配置信息、 媒体接入控制 MAC下行配置信息、 物理下行共享信道 PDSCH配置信息; 为用户设备分配的上行资源配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: SRB 上行配置信息、 DRB上行配置信息、 MAC上行配置信息、 PUSCH配置信息。  Optionally, the downlink resource configuration information that is allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: signaling radio bearer SRB downlink configuration information, data radio bearer DRB downlink configuration information, media access control MAC downlink configuration information, and physical downlink The shared channel PDSCH configuration information includes: one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink configuration information, DRB uplink configuration information, MAC uplink configuration information, PUSCH configuration information.
可选的, 切换命令中还包括指示标识; 指示标识用于指示用户设备与目 标基站新建用于承载待切换的下行传输的下行链路并保留与基站之间的上行 链路; 或,  Optionally, the handover command further includes an indication identifier; the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be handed over and reserve an uplink with the base station; or
指示标识用于指示用户设备与目标基站新建用于承载待切换的上行传输 的上行链路并保留与基站之间的下行链路; 或,  The indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be handed over and reserve the downlink between the base station and the base station; or
指示标识用于指示用户设备与目标基站新建用于承载待切换的下行传输 的下行链路或新建用于承载待切换的上行传输的上行链路, 并保留与基站之 间的上行链路和下行链路。  The indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying downlink transmissions to be switched or newly establish an uplink for carrying uplink transmissions to be switched, and reserve uplink and downlink with the base station. link.
本实施例提供的基站, 为本发明提供的切换方法的执行设备, 其执行切 换方法的具体过程可参见图 1-图 13对应的方法实施例中的相关描述, 不再 赘述。 本实施例提供的基站为源基站, 根据用户设备上报的测量报告, 将用户 设备的上行传输或下行传输切换至目标基站, 从而使用户设备的上行传输和 下行传输中的一个由源基站提供的小区服务器, 另一个由目标基站提供的小 区服务。 例如, 可以是用户设备以较低的功率向微基站发送上行数据, 并且 宏基站可以以较强的发射功率向用户设备发送下行数据。 又如, 当 UE距离 微站中心更近时, 微基站以较低功率向用户设备发送下行数据, 用户设备以 较高功率向宏基站发送上行数据。 从而, 可以降低基站对 UE的干扰, 从而 提高小区吞吐量和频谱效率。 The base station provided in this embodiment is the execution device of the handover method provided by the present invention. For the specific process of performing the handover method, reference may be made to the related description in the method embodiment corresponding to FIG. 1 to FIG. 13 , and details are not described herein again. The base station provided by this embodiment is a source base station, and switches uplink transmission or downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station according to the measurement report reported by the user equipment, so that one of the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the user equipment is provided by the source base station. Cell server, another cell service provided by the target base station. For example, the user equipment may send uplink data to the micro base station at a lower power, and the macro base station may send downlink data to the user equipment with a stronger transmission power. For another example, when the UE is closer to the center of the micro-station, the micro-base station transmits downlink data to the user equipment with lower power, and the user equipment sends the uplink data to the macro base station with higher power. Thereby, the interference of the base station to the UE can be reduced, thereby improving the cell throughput and the spectrum efficiency.
本实施例提供了一种将用户设备的上行传输或下行传输切换至目标基 站, 以使用户设备的上行和下行与不同的基站进行通信的方法, 该方法适用 于现有的载波类型和新载波类型(new carrier type, NCT ), 新载波类型可以 发送或不发送主同步信号 /辅同步信号等, 在 NCT上可以发送增强的物理下 行控制信道( E-PDCCH )或者由其它载波通过 PDCCH或者 E-PDCCH进行 交叉调度。 图 15为本发明提供的基站又一个实施例的结构示意图,该基站可以执行 本发明任意实施例的方法, 该基站例如是目标基站、 或者其他类似的具有跨 站协调功能的设备; 如图 15所示, 该基站包括: 接收单元 21、确定单元 22、 和发送单元 23;  This embodiment provides a method for switching uplink or downlink transmission of a user equipment to a target base station, so that uplink and downlink of the user equipment communicate with different base stations, and the method is applicable to existing carrier types and new carriers. Type (new carrier type, NCT), the new carrier type may or may not send the primary synchronization signal/secondary synchronization signal, etc., may transmit an enhanced physical downlink control channel (E-PDCCH) on the NCT or pass the PDCCH or E by other carriers. - PDCCH performs cross scheduling. FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a base station according to the present invention. The base station may perform a method according to any embodiment of the present invention, where the base station is, for example, a target base station or other similar device with cross-station coordination function; As shown, the base station includes: a receiving unit 21, a determining unit 22, and a transmitting unit 23;
接收单元 21 , 用于接收源基站发送的切换请求消息, 切换请求具有用户 设备待切换的下行传输信息或上行传输信息;  The receiving unit 21 is configured to receive a handover request message sent by the source base station, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
确定单元 22, 用于确定允许用户设备的下行传输或上行传输切换至基站 提供的第一小区;  The determining unit 22 is configured to determine that the downlink transmission or the uplink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the first cell provided by the base station;
发送单元 23, 用于向源基站发送为用户设备分配的待切换的下行传输对 应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源配置信息, 以 便切换后用户设备保持与源基站的上行传输且经由基站进行下行传输, 或以 便切换后用户设备保持与源基站间的下行传输且经由基站进行上行传输; 其中, 下行传输信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类型指示, 或者, 上行传输信息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指示。  The sending unit 23 is configured to send, to the source base station, the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated for the user equipment or the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so that the user equipment maintains the uplink with the source base station after the handover. The downlink transmission is performed by the base station, or the downlink transmission is performed by the user equipment and the uplink transmission is performed by the base station, and the downlink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating downlink transmission handover, or The transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
可选的, 当源基站为微基站, 且基站为宏基站时, 第一小区覆盖切换前 向用户设备提供服务的源基站对应的小区, 或宏基站与微基站提供的频率有 重叠; Optionally, when the source base station is a micro base station, and the base station is a macro base station, the first cell covers the switch before the handover. The cell corresponding to the source base station providing the service to the user equipment, or the frequency provided by the macro base station and the micro base station overlap;
当源基站为宏基站, 且基站为微基站时, 切换前向用户设备提供服务的 源基站对应的小区覆盖第一小区, 或宏基站与微基站提供的频率有重叠。  When the source base station is a macro base station, and the base station is a micro base station, the cell corresponding to the source base station that provides the service to the user equipment before the handover covers the first cell, or the frequency provided by the macro base station and the micro base station overlap.
可选的, 接收单元 21 , 还可以用于接收源基站发送的无线资源分配请求 消息, 无线资源分配请求消息用于基站在第一小区中为用户设备分配待切换 的下行传输对应的下行资源或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源。  Optionally, the receiving unit 21 is further configured to receive a radio resource allocation request message sent by the source base station, where the radio resource allocation request message is used by the base station to allocate, to the user equipment, the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched, or The uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
可选的, 下行传输信息还包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个演进的 无线接入承载 E-RAB标识、至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参 数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 下行 无线资源专用配置信息和 /或用户设备的小区 -无线网络临时标识 C-RNTI 信 息;  Optionally, the downlink transmission information further includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identifier, at least one E-RAB identifier corresponding E-RAB QoS parameter, and radio resource control context information. The radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI information of the user equipment;
上行传输信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 E-RAB标识、 至少 一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 上行无线资源专用配置信息和 /或用户 设备的 C-RNTI信息。  The uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, an E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; where the radio resource control context information includes: Radio resource specific configuration information and/or C-RNTI information of the user equipment.
本实施例提供的基站, 为本发明提供的切换方法的执行设备, 其执行切 换方法的具体过程可参见图 1-图 13对应的方法实施例中的相关描述, 再次 不再赘述。  The base station provided in this embodiment is the execution device of the handover method provided by the present invention. For the specific process of performing the handover method, refer to the related description in the method embodiment corresponding to FIG. 1 to FIG. 13 , and details are not described herein again.
本实施例提供的基站为目标基站,源基站根据用户设备上报的测量报告, 将用户设备的上行传输或下行传输切换至目标基站, 目标基站可以允许用户 设备的上行传输或下行传输切换至目标基站, 从而使用户设备的上行传输和 下行传输中的一个由源基站提供的小区服务, 另一个由目标基站提供的小区 服务, 从而提高小区吞吐量和频谱效率。 图 16为本发明提供的用户设备一个实施例的结构示意图,如图 16所示, 该用户设备包括: 接收单元 31和配置单元 32;  The base station provided in this embodiment is a target base station, and the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station according to the measurement report reported by the user equipment, and the target base station may allow the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the target base station. Therefore, one of the uplink and downlink transmissions of the user equipment is served by the cell provided by the source base station, and the other is provided by the target base station, thereby improving cell throughput and spectrum efficiency. Figure 16 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a user equipment provided by the present invention. As shown in Figure 16, the user equipment includes: a receiving unit 31 and a configuration unit 32;
接收单元 31 , 用于接收源基站发送的切换命令, 切换命令具有为用户设 备分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输 对应的上行资源配置信息; 配置单元 32, 用于根据下行资源配置信息进行下行资源配置, 切换后保 持与源基站的上行传输且经由目标基站进行下行传输; 或根据上行资源配置 信息进行上行资源配置, 切换后保持与源基站间的下行传输且经由目标基站 进行上行传输; The receiving unit 31 is configured to receive a handover command sent by the source base station, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched; The configuration unit 32 is configured to perform downlink resource configuration according to downlink resource configuration information, maintain uplink transmission with the source base station after the handover, and perform downlink transmission via the target base station, or perform uplink resource configuration according to the uplink resource configuration information, and maintain the source base station after the handover. Downlink transmission between each other and uplink transmission via the target base station;
其中, 下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类型指 示, 或, 上行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指示。  The downlink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
可选的, 切换命令中还包括指示标识; 指示标识用于指示用户设备与目 标基站新建用于承载待切换的下行传输的下行链路并保留与源基站之间的上 行链路; 或  Optionally, the handover command further includes an indication identifier; the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be handed over and reserve an uplink relationship with the source base station; or
指示标识用于指示用户设备与目标基站新建用于承载待切换的上行传输 的上行链路并保留与源基站之间的下行链路; 或,  The indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be handed over and reserve the downlink with the source base station; or
指示标识用于指示用户设备与目标基站新建用于承载待切换的下行传输 的下行链路或新建用于承载待切换的上行传输的上行链路, 并保留与源基站 之间的上行链路和下行链路。  The indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be handed over or newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be handed over, and reserve the uplink between the source and the base station. Downlink.
可选的, 该用户设备还包括划分单元 33, 用于: 将 PDCP实体划分为上 行 PDCP实体和下行 PDCP实体, 上行 PDCP实体与源基站提供的第二小 区对应, 下行 PDCP实体与目标基站提供的第一小区对应; 将 RLC实体划 分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体,上行 RLC实体与源基站提供的第二小 区对应, 下行 RLC实体与目标基站提供的第一小区对应;  Optionally, the user equipment further includes a dividing unit 33, configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink PDCP entity and the target base station provide Corresponding to the first cell; the RLC entity is divided into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, where the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station;
其中, 用户设备经由第一小区与目标基站进行下行传输, 并经由第二小 区与源基站进行上行传输。  The user equipment performs downlink transmission with the target base station via the first cell, and performs uplink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
可选的, 源基站为微基站, 目标基站为宏基站。  Optionally, the source base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station.
可选的, 该划分单元 33, 还用于: 将 PDCP实体划分为上行 PDCP实 体和下行 PDCP实体, 上行 PDCP实体与目标基站提供的第一小区对应, 下 行 PDCP实体与源基站提供的第二小区对应;  Optionally, the dividing unit 33 is further configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink PDCP entity and the second cell provided by the source base station Corresponding
将 RLC实体划分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体, 上行 RLC实体与 目标基站提供的第一小区对应, 下行 RLC 实体与源基站提供的第二小区对 应;  The RLC entity is divided into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, and the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station;
其中, 用户设备经由第一小区与目标基站进行上行传输, 并经由第二小 区与源基站进行下行传输。 可选的, 源基站为宏基站, 目标基站为微基站。 The user equipment performs uplink transmission with the target base station via the first cell, and performs downlink transmission with the source base station via the second cell. Optionally, the source base station is a macro base station, and the target base station is a micro base station.
本实施例提供的用户设备, 为本发明提供的切换方法的执行设备, 其执 行切换方法的具体过程可参见图 1 -图 13对应的方法实施例中的相关描述, 再次不再赘述。  The user equipment provided in this embodiment is the execution device of the handover method provided by the present invention. For the specific process of performing the handover method, reference may be made to the related description in the method embodiment corresponding to FIG. 1 to FIG. 13 , and details are not described herein again.
本实施例提供的用户设备, 源基站根据用户设备上报的测量报告, 将用 户设备的上行传输或下行传输切换至目标基站, 从而使用户设备的上行传输 和下行传输中的一个由源基站提供的小区服务, 另一个由目标基站提供的小 区服务, 从而提高小区吞吐量和频谱效率。 图 17为本发明提供的基站又一个实施例的结构示意图,该基站可以执行 本发明任意实施例的方法, 该基站例如是源基站、 或者其他类似的具有跨站 协调功能的设备; 如图 17所示, 该基站包括: 处理器 41和发射机 42;  In the user equipment provided by the embodiment, the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station according to the measurement report reported by the user equipment, so that one of the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the user equipment is provided by the source base station. Cell service, another cell service provided by the target base station, thereby improving cell throughput and spectrum efficiency. FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a base station according to the present invention. The base station may perform a method according to any embodiment of the present invention, where the base station is, for example, a source base station or other similar device with cross-station coordination function; As shown, the base station includes: a processor 41 and a transmitter 42;
处理器 41 , 用于确定将用户设备的下行传输切换至第一小区或者将用户 设备的上行传输切换至第一小区;  The processor 41 is configured to determine to switch downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell or switch uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell;
发射机 42, 用于向第一小区对应的目标基站发送切换请求, 切换请求具 有用户设备待切换的下行传输信息或上行传输信息;  The transmitter 42 is configured to send a handover request to the target base station corresponding to the first cell, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
发射机 42还用于, 向用户设备发送切换命令,切换命令具有为用户设备 分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输对 应的上行资源配置信息, 以便切换后用户设备保持与基站的上行传输且经由 目标基站进行下行传输, 或切换后用户设备保持与基站间的下行传输且经由 目标基站进行上行传输;  The transmitter 42 is further configured to send a handover command to the user equipment, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated for the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so as to switch the user. The device maintains uplink transmission with the base station and performs downlink transmission via the target base station, or the user equipment maintains downlink transmission with the base station after handover and performs uplink transmission via the target base station;
其中, 下行传输信息和下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切 换的切换类型指示, 或, 上行传输信息和上行资源配置信息包括用于指示进 行上行传输切换的切换类型指示。  The downlink transmission information and the downlink resource configuration information include a handover type indication for indicating downlink transmission switching, or the uplink transmission information and the uplink resource configuration information include a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
可选的, 处理器 41可以具体用于: 当基站为微基站, 目标基站为宏基站 时, 确定将用户设备的下行传输切换至由宏基站提供服务的第一小区; 或者, 当基站为宏基站, 目标基站为微基站时, 确定将用户设备的上行传输切换至 由微基站提供服务的第一小区。  Optionally, the processor 41 is specifically configured to: when the base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station, determine to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell served by the macro base station; or, when the base station is the Acer base station When the target base station is a micro base station, it is determined to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell served by the micro base station.
可选的, 当基站为微基站, 且目标基站为宏基站时, 第一小区覆盖切换 前向用户设备提供服务的基站对应的小区, 或宏基站与微基站提供的频率有 重叠; Optionally, when the base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station, the first cell covers a cell corresponding to the base station that provides the service to the user equipment before the handover, or the frequency provided by the macro base station and the micro base station is Overlapping
当基站为宏基站, 且目标基站为微基站时, 切换前向用户设备提供服务 的基站对应的小区覆盖第一小区, 或宏基站与微基站提供的频率有重叠。  When the base station is a macro base station, and the target base station is a micro base station, the cell corresponding to the base station serving the user equipment before the handover covers the first cell, or the frequency provided by the macro base station and the micro base station overlap.
可选的,发射机 42还可以用于:向目标基站发送无线资源分配请求消息, 分配请求消息用于目标基站在第一小区中为用户设备分配待切换的下行传输 对应的下行资源或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源。  Optionally, the transmitter 42 is further configured to: send a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station, where the allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate, to the user equipment, the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched in the first cell or to be switched. The uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission.
可选的,发射机 42还可以用于: 向用户设备发送媒体接入控制层控制单 元 MAC CE, MAC CE用于指示是否允许上行传输和下行传输分离。  Optionally, the transmitter 42 is further configured to: send a media access control layer control unit MAC CE to the user equipment, where the MAC CE is used to indicate whether to allow uplink transmission and downlink transmission separation.
可选的, 下行传输信息还包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个演进的 无线接入承载 E-RAB标识、至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参 数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 下行 无线资源专用配置信息和 /或用户终端的小区 -无线网络临时标识 C-RNTI 信 息;  Optionally, the downlink transmission information further includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identifier, at least one E-RAB identifier corresponding E-RAB QoS parameter, and radio resource control context information. The radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource dedicated configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI information of the user terminal;
上行传输信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 E-RAB标识、 至少 一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 上行无线资源专用配置信息和 /或用户 终端的 C-RNTI信息。  The uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, an E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; where the radio resource control context information includes: Radio resource specific configuration information and/or C-RNTI information of the user terminal.
可选的, 为用户设备分配的下行资源配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组 合: 信令无线承载 SRB下行配置信息、 数据无线承载 DRB下行配置信息、 媒体接入控制 MAC下行配置信息、 物理下行共享信道 PDSCH配置信息; 为用户设备分配的上行资源配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: SRB 上行配置信息、 DRB上行配置信息、 MAC上行配置信息、 PUSCH配置信息。  Optionally, the downlink resource configuration information that is allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: signaling radio bearer SRB downlink configuration information, data radio bearer DRB downlink configuration information, media access control MAC downlink configuration information, and physical downlink The shared channel PDSCH configuration information includes: one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink configuration information, DRB uplink configuration information, MAC uplink configuration information, PUSCH configuration information.
可选的, 切换命令中还包括指示标识; 指示标识用于指示用户设备与目 标基站新建用于承载待切换的下行传输的下行链路并保留与基站之间的上行 链路; 或  Optionally, the handover command further includes an indication identifier, where the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be handed over and reserve an uplink with the base station; or
指示标识用于指示用户设备与目标基站新建用于承载待切换的上行传输 的上行链路并保留与基站之间的下行链路; 或,  The indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be handed over and reserve the downlink between the base station and the base station; or
指示标识用于指示用户设备与目标基站新建用于承载待切换的下行传输 的下行链路或新建用于承载待切换的上行传输的上行链路, 并保留与基站之 间的上行链路和下行链路。 本实施例提供的基站, 为本发明提供的切换方法的执行设备, 其执行切 换方法的具体过程可参见图 1-图 13对应的方法实施例中的相关描述, 再次 不再赘述。 The indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying downlink transmissions to be switched or newly establish an uplink for carrying uplink transmissions to be switched, and reserve uplink and downlink with the base station. link. The base station provided in this embodiment is the execution device of the handover method provided by the present invention. For the specific process of performing the handover method, refer to the related description in the method embodiment corresponding to FIG. 1 to FIG. 13 , and details are not described herein again.
本实施例提供的基站为源基站, 根据用户设备上报的测量报告, 将用户 设备的上行传输或下行传输切换至目标基站, 从而使用户设备的上行传输和 下行传输中的一个由源基站提供的小区服务器, 另一个由目标基站提供的小 区服务, 从而提高小区吞吐量和频谱效率。 本实施例提供了一种将用户设备 的上行传输或下行传输切换至目标基站, 以使用户设备的上行和下行与不同 的基站进行通信的方法, 该方法适用于现有的载波类型和新载波类型 (New Carrier Type, NCT ), 新载波类型可以发送或不发送主同步信号 /辅同步信号 等, 在 NCT上可以发送增强的物理下行控制信道 ( E-PDCCH )或者由其它 载波通过 PDCCH或者 E-PDCCH进行交叉调度。 图 18为本发明提供的基站又一个实施例的结构示意图,该基站可以执行 本发明任意实施例的方法, 该基站例如是目标基站、 或者其他类似的具有跨 站协调功能的设备; 如图 18所示, 该基站包括: 接收机 51、 处理器 52、 和 发射机 53;  The base station provided by this embodiment is a source base station, and switches uplink transmission or downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station according to the measurement report reported by the user equipment, so that one of the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the user equipment is provided by the source base station. The cell server, another cell service provided by the target base station, improves cell throughput and spectral efficiency. This embodiment provides a method for switching uplink or downlink transmission of a user equipment to a target base station, so that uplink and downlink of the user equipment communicate with different base stations, and the method is applicable to existing carrier types and new carriers. Type (New Carrier Type, NCT), the new carrier type may or may not send the primary synchronization signal/secondary synchronization signal, etc., may transmit an enhanced physical downlink control channel (E-PDCCH) on the NCT or pass PDCCH or E from other carriers. - PDCCH performs cross scheduling. FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a base station according to the present invention. The base station may perform a method according to any embodiment of the present invention, where the base station is, for example, a target base station or other similar device having cross-station coordination function; The base station includes: a receiver 51, a processor 52, and a transmitter 53;
接收机 51 , 用于接收源基站发送的切换请求消息, 切换请求具有用户设 备待切换的下行传输信息或上行传输信息;  The receiver 51 is configured to receive a handover request message sent by the source base station, where the handover request has downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
处理器 52, 用于确定允许用户设备的下行传输或上行传输切换至基站提 供的第一小区;  The processor 52 is configured to determine that the downlink transmission or the uplink transmission of the user equipment is allowed to be switched to the first cell provided by the base station;
发射机 53, 用于向源基站发送为用户设备分配的待切换的下行传输对应 的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源配置信息, 以便 切换后用户设备保持与源基站的上行传输且经由基站进行下行传输, 或以便 切换后用户设备保持与源基站间的下行传输且经由基站进行上行传输;  The transmitter 53 is configured to send, to the source base station, the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated for the user equipment or the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched, so that the user equipment maintains the uplink with the source base station after the handover. Transmitting and performing downlink transmission via the base station, or so that the user equipment maintains downlink transmission with the source base station after handover and performs uplink transmission via the base station;
其中, 下行传输信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类型指示, 或者, 上行传输信息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指示。  The downlink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink transmission information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
可选的, 当源基站为微基站, 且基站为宏基站时, 第一小区覆盖切换前 向用户设备提供服务的源基站对应的小区, 或宏基站与微基站提供的频率有 重叠; 当源基站为宏基站, 且基站为微基站时, 切换前向用户设备提供服务的 源基站对应的小区覆盖第一小区, 或宏基站与微基站提供的频率有重叠。 Optionally, when the source base station is a micro base station, and the base station is a macro base station, the first cell covers a cell corresponding to the source base station that provides the service to the user equipment before the handover, or the frequency provided by the macro base station and the micro base station overlap; When the source base station is a macro base station, and the base station is a micro base station, the cell corresponding to the source base station that provides the service to the user equipment before the handover covers the first cell, or the frequency provided by the macro base station and the micro base station overlap.
可选的,接收机 51还可以用于:接收源基站发送的无线资源分配请求消 息, 无线资源分配请求消息用于基站在第一小区中为用户设备分配待切换的 下行传输对应的下行资源或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源。  Optionally, the receiver 51 is further configured to: receive a radio resource allocation request message sent by the source base station, where the radio resource allocation request message is used by the base station to allocate, to the user equipment, the downlink resource corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched, or The uplink resource corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
可选的, 下行传输信息还包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个演进的 无线接入承载 E-RAB标识、至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参 数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 下行 无线资源专用配置信息和 /或用户设备的小区 -无线网络临时标识 C-RNTI 信 息;  Optionally, the downlink transmission information further includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identifier, at least one E-RAB identifier corresponding E-RAB QoS parameter, and radio resource control context information. The radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource specific configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI information of the user equipment;
上行传输信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 E-RAB标识、 至少 一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 上行无线资源专用配置信息和 /或用户 设备的 C-RNTI信息。  The uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, an E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; where the radio resource control context information includes: Radio resource specific configuration information and/or C-RNTI information of the user equipment.
本实施例提供的基站, 为本发明提供的切换方法的执行设备, 其执行切 换方法的具体过程可参见图 1-图 13对应的方法实施例中的相关描述, 再次 不再赘述。  The base station provided in this embodiment is the execution device of the handover method provided by the present invention. For the specific process of performing the handover method, refer to the related description in the method embodiment corresponding to FIG. 1 to FIG. 13 , and details are not described herein again.
本实施例提供的基站为目标基站,源基站根据用户设备上报的测量报告, 将用户设备的上行传输或下行传输切换至目标基站, 目标基站可以允许用户 设备的上行传输或下行传输切换至目标基站, 从而使用户设备的上行传输和 下行传输中的一个由源基站提供的小区服务, 另一个由目标基站提供的小区 服务, 从而提高小区吞吐量和频谱效率。 图 19为本发明提供的用户设备又一个实施例的结构示意图, 如图 19所 示, 该用户设包括: 接收机 61和处理器 62;  The base station provided in this embodiment is a target base station, and the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station according to the measurement report reported by the user equipment, and the target base station may allow the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the target base station. Therefore, one of the uplink and downlink transmissions of the user equipment is served by the cell provided by the source base station, and the other is provided by the target base station, thereby improving cell throughput and spectrum efficiency. FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of still another embodiment of a user equipment according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 19, the user equipment includes: a receiver 61 and a processor 62;
接收机 61 , 用于接收源基站发送的切换命令, 切换命令具有为用户设备 分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输对 应的上行资源配置信息;  The receiver 61 is configured to receive a handover command sent by the source base station, where the handover command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched allocated by the user equipment or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched;
处理器 62, 用于根据下行资源配置信息进行下行资源配置, 切换后保持 与源基站的上行传输且经由目标基站进行下行传输; 或根据上行资源配置信 息进行上行资源配置, 切换后保持与源基站间的下行传输且经由目标基站进 行上行传输; The processor 62 is configured to perform downlink resource configuration according to downlink resource configuration information, maintain uplink transmission with the source base station after the handover, and perform downlink transmission via the target base station; or Perform uplink resource configuration, maintain downlink transmission with the source base station after handover, and perform uplink transmission via the target base station;
其中, 下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类型指 示, 或, 上行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指示。  The downlink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating a downlink transmission handover, or the uplink resource configuration information includes a handover type indication for indicating an uplink transmission handover.
可选的, 切换命令中还包括指示标识; 指示标识用于指示用户设备与目 标基站新建用于承载待切换的下行传输的下行链路并保留与源基站之间的上 行链路; 或  Optionally, the handover command further includes an indication identifier; the indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be handed over and reserve an uplink relationship with the source base station; or
指示标识用于指示用户设备与目标基站新建用于承载待切换的上行传输 的上行链路并保留与源基站之间的下行链路; 或,  The indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be handed over and reserve the downlink with the source base station; or
指示标识用于指示用户设备与目标基站新建用于承载待切换的下行传输 的下行链路或新建用于承载待切换的上行传输的上行链路, 并保留与源基站 之间的上行链路和下行链路。  The indication identifier is used to indicate that the user equipment and the target base station newly establish a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be handed over or newly establish an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be handed over, and reserve the uplink between the source and the base station. Downlink.
可选的, 处理器 62还可以用于: 将 PDCP实体划分为上行 PDCP实体 和下行 PDCP 实体, 上行 PDCP 实体与源基站提供的第二小区对应, 下行 PDCP实体与目标基站提供的第一小区对应;用户设备将 RLC实体划分为上 行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体,上行 RLC实体与源基站提供的第二小区对应, 下行 RLC实体与目标基站提供的第一小区对应;  Optionally, the processor 62 is further configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station The user equipment divides the RLC entity into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station;
其中, 用户设备经由第一小区与目标基站进行下行传输, 并经由第二小 区与源基站进行上行传输。  The user equipment performs downlink transmission with the target base station via the first cell, and performs uplink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
可选的, 源基站为 基站, 目标基站为宏基站。  Optionally, the source base station is a base station, and the target base station is a macro base station.
可选的, 处理器 62还可以用于: 将 PDCP实体划分为上行 PDCP实体 和下行 PDCP实体, 上行 PDCP实体与目标基站提供的第一小区对应, 下行 PDCP实体与源基站提供的第二小区对应;  Optionally, the processor 62 is further configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station ;
将 RLC实体划分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体, 上行 RLC实体与 目标基站提供的第一小区对应, 下行 RLC 实体与源基站提供的第二小区对 应;  The RLC entity is divided into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, and the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station;
其中, 用户设备经由第一小区与目标基站进行上行传输, 并经由第二小 区与源基站进行下行传输。  The user equipment performs uplink transmission with the target base station via the first cell, and performs downlink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
可选的, 源基站为微基站, 目标基站为宏基站。  Optionally, the source base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station.
本实施例提供的用户设备, 为本发明提供的切换方法的执行设备, 其执 行切换方法的具体过程可参见图 1 -图 13对应的方法实施例中的相关描述, 再次不再赘述。 The user equipment provided in this embodiment is an execution device of the handover method provided by the present invention, and the implementation thereof For the specific process of the line switching method, refer to the related description in the method embodiment corresponding to FIG. 1 to FIG. 13 , and details are not described again.
本实施例提供的用户设备, 源基站根据用户设备上报的测量报告, 将用 户设备的上行传输或下行传输切换至目标基站, 从而使用户设备的上行传输 和下行传输中的一个由源基站提供的小区服务, 另一个由目标基站提供的小 区服务, 从而提高小区吞吐量和频谱效率。 图 20为本发明提供的通讯系统的一个实施例的结构示意图, 如图 20所 示, 该通讯系统包括:  In the user equipment provided by the embodiment, the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station according to the measurement report reported by the user equipment, so that one of the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the user equipment is provided by the source base station. Cell service, another cell service provided by the target base station, thereby improving cell throughput and spectrum efficiency. FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a communication system according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 20, the communication system includes:
上述任意实施例中的源基站 71 ; 和  a source base station 71 in any of the above embodiments; and
上述任意实施例中的目标基站 72。  The target base station 72 in any of the above embodiments.
上述源基站所实现的动作可参考上述方法实施例或装置实施例中源基站 所执行的动作, 上述目标基站所实现的动作可参考上述方法实施例或装置实 施例中目标基站所执行的动作, 在此不再赘述。  For the operations performed by the source base station, refer to the operations performed by the source base station in the foregoing method embodiment or the device embodiment. The action performed by the target base station may refer to the action performed by the target base station in the foregoing method embodiment or the device embodiment. I will not repeat them here.
本实施例提供的通讯系统中, 源基站将用户设备的上行传输或下行传输 切换至目标基站, 目标基站可以允许用户设备的上行传输或下行传输切换至 目标基站, 从而使用户设备的上行和下行分别与不同的基站进行通信, 从而 提高吞吐量和频谱效率。 所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到, 为描述的方便和简洁, 仅以上 述各功能单元的划分进行举例说明, 实际应用中, 可以根据需要而将上述功 能分配由不同的功能单元完成,即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能单元, 以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。 上述描述的系统, 装置和单元的具体 工作过程, 可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程, 在此不再赘述。  In the communication system provided by the embodiment, the source base station switches the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the target base station, and the target base station may allow the uplink transmission or the downlink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the target base station, thereby enabling the uplink and downlink of the user equipment. Communicate with different base stations separately to improve throughput and spectrum efficiency. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that, for convenience and brevity of description, only the division of each functional unit described above is exemplified. In practical applications, the above-mentioned function assignment can be completed by different functional units as needed. The internal structure of the device is divided into different functional units to perform all or part of the functions described above. For the specific working process of the system, the device and the unit described above, reference may be made to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中, 应该理解到, 所揭露的系统, 装置和 方法, 可以通过其它的方式实现。 例如, 以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示 意性的, 例如, 所述单元或单元的划分, 仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分, 实际实 现时可以有另外的划分方式, 例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到 另一个系统, 或一些特征可以忽略, 或不执行。 另一点, 所显示或讨论的相 互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口, 装置或单元的间 接耦合或通信连接, 可以是电性, 机械或其它的形式。 In the several embodiments provided by the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, apparatus, and method may be implemented in other manners. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative. For example, the division of the unit or unit is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner, for example, multiple units or components may be used. Combined or can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not executed. Alternatively, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interface, device or unit. The coupling or communication connection can be in electrical, mechanical or other form.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的, 作 为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元, 即可以位于一个地方, 或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。 可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或 者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。  The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solution of the embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中, 也可以是各个单元单独物理存在, 也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单 元中。 上述集成的单元既可以釆用硬件的形式实现, 也可以釆用软件功能单 元的形式实现。  In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of a software function unit.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售 或使用时, 可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。 基于这样的理解, 本 申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的 全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来, 该计算机软件产品存储在一个 存储介质中, 包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机, 服务器, 或者网络设备等)或处理器(processor )执行本申请各个实施例所 述方法的全部或部分步骤。 而前述的存储介质包括: U 盘、 移动硬盘、 只读 存储器( ROM , read-only memory ),随机存取存储器( RAM , random access memory )、 磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。  The integrated unit, if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product, may be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on such understanding, the technical solution of the present application, in essence or the contribution to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium. The instructions include a plurality of instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present application. The foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a removable hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk or an optical disk, and the like, which can store program code. .
以上所述, 以上实施例仅用以说明本申请的技术方案, 而非对其限制; 尽管参照前述实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明, 本领域的普通技术人员应 当理解: 其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改, 或者对其 中部分技术特征进行等同替换; 而这些修改或者替换, 并不使相应技术方案 的本质脱离本申请各实施例技术方案的精神和范围。  The above embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solutions of the present application, and are not limited thereto. Although the present application has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those skilled in the art should understand that The technical solutions described in the embodiments are modified, or some of the technical features are equivalently replaced; and the modifications or substitutions do not depart from the spirit and scope of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application.

Claims

权 利 要求 Rights request
1、 一种切换方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 1. A switching method, characterized by including:
源基站确定将用户设备的下行传输切换至第一小区或者将用户设备的上 行传输切换至第一小区; The source base station determines to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell or to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell;
所述源基站向所述第一小区对应的目标基站发送切换请求, 所述切换请 求具有所述用户设备待切换的下行传输信息或上行传输信息; The source base station sends a handover request to the target base station corresponding to the first cell, where the handover request contains downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
所述源基站向所述用户设备发送切换命令, 所述切换命令具有为所述用 户设备分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行 传输对应的上行资源配置信息, 以便切换后所述用户设备保持与所述源基站 的所述上行传输且经由所述目标基站进行所述下行传输, 或切换后所述用户 设备保持与所述源基站间的所述下行传输且经由所述目标基站进行所述上行 传输; The source base station sends a switching command to the user equipment, where the switching command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched allocated to the user equipment, so that After the handover, the user equipment maintains the uplink transmission with the source base station and performs the downlink transmission via the target base station, or after the handover, the user equipment maintains the downlink transmission with the source base station and performs the downlink transmission via the target base station. The target base station performs the uplink transmission;
其中, 所述下行传输信息和所述下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下 行传输切换的切换类型指示, 或, 所述上行传输信息和所述上行资源配置信 息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指示。 Wherein, the downlink transmission information and the downlink resource configuration information include a switching type indication for instructing downlink transmission switching, or, the uplink transmission information and the uplink resource configuration information include a switching type indication for instructing uplink transmission switching. Switch type indication.
2、 根据权利要求 1所述的方法, 其特征在于: 2. The method according to claim 1, characterized in that:
所述源基站确定将所述用户设备的下行传输切换至第一小区,具体包括: 当所述源基站为微基站, 所述目标基站为宏基站时, 所述微基站确定将 所述用户设备的下行传输切换至由所述宏基站提供服务的所述第一小区; 或, The source base station determines to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell, specifically including: when the source base station is a micro base station and the target base station is a macro base station, the micro base station determines to switch the user equipment to the first cell. Switch the downlink transmission to the first cell served by the macro base station; or,
所述源基站确定将所述用户设备的上行传输切换至第一小区,具体包括: 当所述源基站为宏基站, 所述目标基站为微基站时, 所述宏基站确定将 所述用户设备的上行传输切换至由所述微基站提供服务的所述第一小区。 The source base station determines to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell, specifically including: when the source base station is a macro base station and the target base station is a micro base station, the macro base station determines to switch the user equipment to the first cell. The uplink transmission is switched to the first cell served by the micro base station.
3、 根据权利要求 1或 2所述的方法, 其特征在于: 3. The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that:
所述第一小区与切换前向所述用户设备提供服务的所述源基站对应的小 区的覆盖范围有重叠; 或, The coverage of the first cell overlaps with the cell corresponding to the source base station that provided services to the user equipment before handover; or,
所述目标基站与所述源基站的频率有重叠。 The frequencies of the target base station and the source base station overlap.
4、 根据权利要求 1-3任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述源基站向所 述目标基站发送切换请求消息之前, 还包括: 4. The method according to any one of claims 1-3, characterized in that, before the source base station sends a handover request message to the target base station, it further includes:
所述源基站向所述目标基站发送无线资源分配请求消息, 所述分配请求 消息用于所述目标基站在所述第一小区中为所述用户设备分配待切换的下行 传输对应的下行资源或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源。 The source base station sends a wireless resource allocation request message to the target base station, and the allocation request The message is used by the target base station to allocate downlink resources corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or uplink resources corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched to the user equipment in the first cell.
5、 根据权利要求 1-4任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 还包括: 所述源基站向所述用户设备发送媒体接入控制层控制单元 MAC CE, 所 述 MAC CE用于指示是否允许上行传输和下行传输分离。 5. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, further comprising: the source base station sending a media access control layer control element MAC CE to the user equipment, the MAC CE being used to indicate Whether to allow separation of uplink transmission and downlink transmission.
6、 根据权利要求 1-5任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于: 6. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that:
所述下行传输信息还包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个演进的无线 接入承载 E-RAB标识、所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参 数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 下行无线资源专用配置信息和 /或所述用户设备的小区-无线网络临时标识 C-RNTI信息; The downlink transmission information also includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identity, E-RAB quality of service parameters corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identity, and radio resource control context information. ; Wherein, the radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource dedicated configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identity C-RNTI information of the user equipment;
所述上行传输信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 E-RAB标识、 所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下 文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 上行无线资源专用配置 信息和 /或所述用户设备的 C-RNTI信息。 The uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, the E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; wherein, the radio resource The control context information includes: uplink radio resource dedicated configuration information and/or C-RNTI information of the user equipment.
7、 根据权利要求 1-6任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于: 7. The method according to any one of claims 1-6, characterized in that:
所述为所述用户设备分配的下行资源配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组 合: 信令无线承载 SRB下行配置信息、 数据无线承载 DRB下行配置信息、 媒体接入控制 MAC下行配置信息、 物理下行共享信道 PDSCH配置信息; 所述为所述用户设备分配的上行资源配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组 合: SRB上行配置信息、 DRB上行配置信息、 MAC上行配置信息、 PUSCH 配置信息。 The downlink resource configuration information allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: signaling radio bearer SRB downlink configuration information, data radio bearer DRB downlink configuration information, media access control MAC downlink configuration information, physical downlink Shared channel PDSCH configuration information; The uplink resource configuration information allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink configuration information, DRB uplink configuration information, MAC uplink configuration information, and PUSCH configuration information.
8、 根据权利要求 1-7任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于: 8. The method according to any one of claims 1-7, characterized in that:
所述切换命令中还包括指示标识; The switching command also includes an indication mark;
所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述 待切换的下行传输的下行链路并保留与所述源基站之间的上行链路; 或 The indication identifier is used to instruct the user equipment and the target base station to create a new downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched and reserve an uplink with the source base station; or
所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述 待切换的上行传输的上行链路并保留与所述源基站之间的下行链路; 或, 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述 待切换的下行传输的下行链路或新建用于承载所述待切换的上行传输的上行 链路, 并保留与所述源基站之间的上行链路和下行链路。 The indication identifier is used to instruct the user equipment and the target base station to create a new uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched and reserve a downlink with the source base station; or, the indication The identifier is used to instruct the user equipment and the target base station to create a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched or to create an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched. link, and retains the uplink and downlink with the source base station.
9、 一种切换方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 9. A switching method, characterized by including:
目标基站接收源基站发送的切换请求, 所述切换请求具有用户设备待切 换的下行传输信息或上行传输信息; The target base station receives a handover request sent by the source base station, where the handover request contains downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
所述目标基站确定允许所述用户设备的下行传输或上行传输切换至所述 目标基站提供的第一小区; The target base station determines to allow the downlink transmission or uplink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the first cell provided by the target base station;
所述目标基站向所述源基站发送为所述用户设备分配的待切换的下行传 输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源配置信 息, 以便切换后所述用户设备保持与所述源基站的所述上行传输且经由所述 目标基站进行所述下行传输, 或以便切换后所述用户设备保持与所述源基站 间的所述下行传输且经由所述目标基站进行所述上行传输; The target base station sends to the source base station the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched allocated to the user equipment, so that the user equipment remains connected after the switch. The uplink transmission of the source base station and the downlink transmission via the target base station, or so that after the handover, the user equipment maintains the downlink transmission with the source base station and performs the downlink transmission via the target base station. Uplink transmission;
其中 , 所述下行传输信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类型指 示, 或者, 所述上行传输信息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指 示。 Wherein, the downlink transmission information includes a switching type indication for instructing downlink transmission switching, or the uplink transmission information includes a switching type indication for instructing uplink transmission switching.
10、 根据权利要求 9所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述目标基站确定允许 所述用户设备的下行传输切换至所述目标基站提供的第一小区, 具体包括: 当所述源基站为微基站, 所述目标基站为宏基站时, 所述目标基站确定 允许所述用户设备的下行传输切换至所述目标基站提供的第一小区; 10. The method according to claim 9, characterized in that the target base station determines to allow the downlink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the first cell provided by the target base station, specifically including: when the source base station is a micro Base station, when the target base station is a macro base station, the target base station determines to allow the downlink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the first cell provided by the target base station;
或, or,
所述目标基站确定允许所述用户设备的上行传输切换至所述目标基站提 供的第一小区, 具体包括: The target base station determines to allow the user equipment's uplink transmission to be switched to the first cell provided by the target base station, specifically including:
当所述源基站为宏基站, 所述目标基站为微基站时, 所述目标基站确定 允许所述用户设备的上行传输切换至所述目标基站提供的第一小区。 When the source base station is a macro base station and the target base station is a micro base station, the target base station determines to allow the uplink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the first cell provided by the target base station.
11、根据权利要求 9或 10所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述目标基站接收 源基站发送的切换请求之前, 还包括: 11. The method according to claim 9 or 10, characterized in that, before the target base station receives the handover request sent by the source base station, it further includes:
所述目标基站接收所述源基站发送的无线资源分配请求消息, 所述无线 资源分配请求消息用于所述目标基站在所述第一小区中为所述用户设备分配 待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源。 The target base station receives the radio resource allocation request message sent by the source base station. The radio resource allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate the downlink transmission corresponding to the to-be-switched downlink transmission to the user equipment in the first cell. Downlink resources or uplink resources corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
12、 根据权利要求 9-11任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述下行传输 信息还包括以下一种或任意种组合:至少一个演进的无线接入承载 E-RAB标 识、 所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制 上下文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 下行无线资源专用 配置信息和 /或所述用户设备的小区 -无线网络临时标识 C-RNTI信息; 12. The method according to any one of claims 9-11, characterized in that the downlink transmission information also includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB standard identification, E-RAB service quality parameters corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; wherein the radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource dedicated configuration information and/or the user equipment's Cell-radio network temporary identity C-RNTI information;
所述上行传输信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 E-RAB标识、 所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下 文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 上行无线资源专用配置 信息和 /或所述用户设备的 C-RNTI信息。 The uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, the E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; wherein, the radio resource The control context information includes: uplink radio resource dedicated configuration information and/or C-RNTI information of the user equipment.
13、 一种切换方法, 其特征在于, 包括: 13. A switching method, characterized by including:
用户设备接收源基站发送的切换命令, 所述切换命令具有为所述用户设 备分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输 对应的上行资源配置信息; The user equipment receives a switching command sent by the source base station, where the switching command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched allocated to the user equipment;
所述用户设备根据所述下行资源配置信息进行下行资源配置, 切换后保 持与所述源基站的所述上行传输且经由目标基站进行所述下行传输; 或根据 所述上行资源配置信息进行上行资源配置, 切换后保持与所述源基站间的所 述下行传输且经由所述目标基站进行所述上行传输; The user equipment performs downlink resource configuration according to the downlink resource configuration information, maintains the uplink transmission with the source base station after handover and performs the downlink transmission via the target base station; or performs uplink resource configuration according to the uplink resource configuration information. configured to maintain the downlink transmission with the source base station after handover and perform the uplink transmission via the target base station;
其中, 所述下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类 型指示, 或, 所述上行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换 类型指示。 Wherein, the downlink resource configuration information includes a switching type indication for instructing downlink transmission switching, or the uplink resource configuration information includes a switching type indication for instructing uplink transmission switching.
14、 根据权利要求 13 所述的方法, 其特征在于: 所述用户设备接收的 所述切换命令中还包括指示标识; 14. The method according to claim 13, characterized in that: the switching command received by the user equipment further includes an indication identifier;
所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述 待切换的下行传输的下行链路并保留与所述源基站之间的上行链路; 或 The indication identifier is used to instruct the user equipment and the target base station to create a new downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched and reserve an uplink with the source base station; or
所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述 待切换的上行传输的上行链路并保留与所述源基站之间的下行链路; 或, 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述 待切换的下行传输的下行链路或新建用于承载所述待切换的上行传输的上行 链路, 并保留与所述源基站之间的上行链路和下行链路。 The indication identifier is used to instruct the user equipment and the target base station to create a new uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched and reserve a downlink with the source base station; or, the indication The identifier is used to instruct the user equipment and the target base station to create a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched or to create an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched, and is reserved with the Uplink and downlink between source base stations.
15、 根据权利要求 13或 14所述的方法, 其特征在于, 还包括: 所述用户设备将所述 PDCP实体划分为上行 PDCP实体和下行 PDCP 实体, 所述上行 PDCP 实体与所述源基站提供的第二小区对应, 所述下行 PDCP实体与所述目标基站提供的第一小区对应; 15. The method according to claim 13 or 14, characterized in that, further comprising: the user equipment divides the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, and the uplink PDCP entity and the source base station provide The second cell corresponds to, the downlink The PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station;
所述用户设备将所述 RLC实体划分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体, 所述上行 RLC实体与所述源基站提供的第二小区对应, 所述下行 RLC实体 与所述目标基站提供的第一小区对应; The user equipment divides the RLC entity into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station. Community correspondence;
其中, 所述用户设备经由所述第一小区与所述目标基站进行所述下行传 输, 并经由所述第二小区与所述源基站进行所述上行传输。 Wherein, the user equipment performs the downlink transmission with the target base station via the first cell, and performs the uplink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
16、 根据权利要求 15所述的方法, 其特征在于: 16. The method according to claim 15, characterized in that:
所述源基站为微基站, 所述目标基站为宏基站。 The source base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station.
17、 根据权利要求 13或 14所述的方法, 其特征在于, 还包括: 所述用户设备将所述 PDCP实体划分为上行 PDCP实体和下行 PDCP 实体, 所述上行 PDCP实体与所述目标基站提供的第一小区对应, 所述下行 PDCP实体与所述源基站提供的第二小区对应; 17. The method according to claim 13 or 14, further comprising: the user equipment divides the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, and the uplink PDCP entity and the target base station provide corresponds to the first cell, and the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station;
所述用户设备将所述 RLC实体划分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体, 所述上行 RLC实体与所述目标基站提供的第一小区对应, 所述下行 RLC实 体与所述源基站提供的第二小区对应; The user equipment divides the RLC entity into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station. Community correspondence;
其中, 所述用户设备经由所述第一小区与所述目标基站进行所述上行传 输, 并经由所述第二小区与所述源基站进行所述下行传输。 Wherein, the user equipment performs the uplink transmission with the target base station via the first cell, and performs the downlink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
18、 根据权利要求 17所述的方法, 其特征在于: 18. The method according to claim 17, characterized in that:
所述源基站为宏基站, 所述目标基站为微基站。 The source base station is a macro base station, and the target base station is a micro base station.
19、 一种基站, 其特征在于, 包括: 19. A base station, characterized by including:
确定单元, 用于确定将用户设备的下行传输切换至第一小区或者将用户 设备的上行传输切换至第一小区; Determining unit, used to determine to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell or to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell;
发送单元, 用于向所述第一小区对应的目标基站发送切换请求, 所述切 换请求具有所述用户设备待切换的下行传输信息或上行传输信息; A sending unit, configured to send a handover request to the target base station corresponding to the first cell, where the handover request contains downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
所述发送单元还用于, 向所述用户设备发送切换命令, 所述切换命令具 有为所述用户设备分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待 切换的上行传输对应的上行资源配置信息, 以便切换后所述用户设备保持与 所述基站的所述上行传输且经由所述目标基站进行所述下行传输, 或切换后 所述用户设备保持与所述基站间的所述下行传输且经由所述目标基站进行所 述上行传输; 其中, 所述下行传输信息和所述下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下 行传输切换的切换类型指示, 或, 所述上行传输信息和所述上行资源配置信 息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指示。 The sending unit is also configured to send a switching command to the user equipment, where the switching command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or uplink resources corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched allocated to the user equipment. Configure information so that after the handover, the user equipment maintains the uplink transmission with the base station and performs the downlink transmission via the target base station, or after the handover, the user equipment maintains the downlink transmission with the base station. and perform the uplink transmission via the target base station; Wherein, the downlink transmission information and the downlink resource configuration information include a switching type indication for instructing downlink transmission switching, or, the uplink transmission information and the uplink resource configuration information include a switching type indication for instructing uplink transmission switching. Switch type indication.
20、 根据权利要求 19 所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述确定单元具体用 于: 20. The base station according to claim 19, characterized in that the determining unit is specifically used to:
当所述基站为微基站, 所述目标基站为宏基站时, 确定将所述用户设备 的下行传输切换至由所述宏基站提供服务的所述第一小区; 或, When the base station is a micro base station and the target base station is a macro base station, determine to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell provided by the macro base station; or,
当所述基站为宏基站, 所述目标基站为微基站时, 确定将所述用户设备 的上行传输切换至由所述微基站提供服务的所述第一小区。 When the base station is a macro base station and the target base station is a micro base station, it is determined to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell provided by the micro base station.
21、 根据权利要求 19或 20所述的基站, 其特征在于: 21. The base station according to claim 19 or 20, characterized in that:
所述第一小区与切换前向所述用户设备提供服务的所述基站对应的小区 的覆盖范围有重叠; 或, The coverage of the first cell overlaps with that of the cell corresponding to the base station that provided services to the user equipment before handover; or,
所述基站与所述目标基站的频率有重叠。 The frequencies of the base station and the target base station overlap.
22、 根据权利要求 19-21任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于: 22. The base station according to any one of claims 19-21, characterized in that:
所述发送单元还用于: 向所述目标基站发送无线资源分配请求消息, 所 述分配请求消息用于所述目标基站在所述第一小区中为所述用户设备分配待 切换的下行传输对应的下行资源或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源。 The sending unit is also configured to: send a radio resource allocation request message to the target base station, where the allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate the downlink transmission correspondence to be switched to the user equipment in the first cell. The downlink resources or the uplink resources corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
23、 根据权利要求 19-22任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于: 23. The base station according to any one of claims 19-22, characterized in that:
所述发送单元还用于: 向所述用户设备发送媒体接入控制层控制单元 MAC CE, 所述 MAC CE用于指示是否允许上行传输和下行传输分离。 The sending unit is also configured to: send a media access control layer control unit MAC CE to the user equipment, where the MAC CE is used to indicate whether to allow separation of uplink transmission and downlink transmission.
24、 根据权利要求 19-23任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于: 24. The base station according to any one of claims 19-23, characterized in that:
所述下行传输信息还包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个演进的无线 接入承载 E-RAB标识、所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参 数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 下行无线资源专用配置信息和 /或所述用户终端的小区-无线网络临时标识 C-RNTI信息; The downlink transmission information also includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identity, E-RAB quality of service parameters corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identity, and radio resource control context information. ; Wherein, the radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource dedicated configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identity C-RNTI information of the user terminal;
所述上行传输信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 E-RAB标识、 所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下 文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 上行无线资源专用配置 信息和 /或所述用户终端的 C-RNTI信息。 The uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, the E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; wherein, the radio resource The control context information includes: uplink radio resource dedicated configuration information and/or C-RNTI information of the user terminal.
25、 根据权利要求 19-24任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于: 所述为所述用户设备分配的下行资源配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组 合: 信令无线承载 SRB下行配置信息、 数据无线承载 DRB下行配置信息、 媒体接入控制 MAC下行配置信息、 物理下行共享信道 PDSCH配置信息; 所述为所述用户设备分配的上行资源配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组 合: SRB上行配置信息、 DRB上行配置信息、 MAC上行配置信息、 PUSCH 配置信息。 25. The base station according to any one of claims 19 to 24, characterized in that: the downlink resource configuration information allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: Signaling radio bearer SRB downlink configuration information , data radio bearer DRB downlink configuration information, media access control MAC downlink configuration information, physical downlink shared channel PDSCH configuration information; The uplink resource configuration information allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink Configuration information, DRB uplink configuration information, MAC uplink configuration information, PUSCH configuration information.
26、 根据权利要求 19-25任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于: 26. The base station according to any one of claims 19-25, characterized in that:
所述切换命令中还包括指示标识; The switching command also includes an indication mark;
所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载待切 换的下行传输的下行链路并保留与所述基站之间的上行链路; 或 The indication identifier is used to instruct the user equipment and the target base station to create a new downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched and reserve the uplink with the base station; or
所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述 待切换的上行传输的上行链路并保留与所述基站之间的下行链路; 或, The indication identifier is used to instruct the user equipment and the target base station to create a new uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched and reserve a downlink with the base station; or,
所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述 待切换的下行传输的下行链路或新建用于承载所述待切换的上行传输的上行 链路, 并保留与所述基站之间的上行链路和下行链路 The indication mark is used to instruct the user equipment and the target base station to create a new downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched or to create an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched, and retain it. Uplink and downlink to and from the base station
27、 一种基站, 其特征在于, 包括: 27. A base station, characterized by including:
接收单元, 用于接收源基站发送的切换请求消息, 所述切换请求具有用 户设备待切换的下行传输信息或上行传输信息; A receiving unit, configured to receive a handover request message sent by the source base station, where the handover request contains downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
确定单元, 用于确定允许所述用户设备的下行传输或上行传输切换至所 述基站提供的第一小区; Determining unit, configured to determine to allow the downlink transmission or uplink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the first cell provided by the base station;
发送单元, 用于向所述源基站发送为所述用户设备分配的待切换的下行 传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源配置信 息, 以便切换后所述用户设备保持与所述源基站的所述上行传输且经由所述 基站进行所述下行传输, 或以便切换后所述用户设备保持与所述源基站间的 所述下行传输且经由所述基站进行所述上行传输; A sending unit, configured to send the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched allocated to the user equipment to the source base station, so that the user equipment maintains the The uplink transmission with the source base station and the downlink transmission via the base station, or so that after the handover, the user equipment maintains the downlink transmission with the source base station and performs the uplink via the base station transmission; transmission
其中 , 所述下行传输信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类型指 示, 或者, 所述上行传输信息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指 示。 Wherein, the downlink transmission information includes a switching type indication for instructing downlink transmission switching, or the uplink transmission information includes a switching type indication for instructing uplink transmission switching.
28、 根据权利要求 27 所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述确定单元, 具体 用于: 28. The base station according to claim 27, characterized in that, the determining unit, specifically Used for:
当所述源基站为微基站, 所述基站为宏基站时, 确定允许所述用户设备 的下行传输切换至所述基站提供的第一小区; 或, When the source base station is a micro base station and the base station is a macro base station, it is determined to allow the downlink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the first cell provided by the base station; or,
当所述源基站为宏基站, 所述基站为微基站时, 确定允许所述用户设备 的上行传输切换至所述基站提供的第一小区。 When the source base station is a macro base station and the base station is a micro base station, it is determined to allow the uplink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the first cell provided by the base station.
29、 根据权利要求 27或 28所述的基站, 其特征在于: 29. The base station according to claim 27 or 28, characterized in that:
所述接收单元, 还用于接收所述源基站发送的无线资源分配请求消息, 所述无线资源分配请求消息用于所述基站在所述第一小区中为所述用户设备 分配待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资 源。 The receiving unit is also configured to receive a radio resource allocation request message sent by the source base station. The radio resource allocation request message is used by the base station to allocate downlink to be switched to the user equipment in the first cell. Downlink resources corresponding to the transmission or uplink resources corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
30、 根据权利要求 27-29任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于: 30. The base station according to any one of claims 27-29, characterized in that:
所述下行传输信息还包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个演进的无线 接入承载 E-RAB标识、所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参 数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 下行无线资源专用配置信息和 /或所述用户设备的小区-无线网络临时标识 C-RNTI信息; The downlink transmission information also includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identity, E-RAB quality of service parameters corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identity, and radio resource control context information. ; Wherein, the radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource dedicated configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identity C-RNTI information of the user equipment;
所述上行传输信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 E-RAB标识、 所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下 文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 上行无线资源专用配置 信息和 /或所述用户设备的 C-RNTI信息。 The uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, the E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; wherein, the radio resource The control context information includes: uplink radio resource dedicated configuration information and/or C-RNTI information of the user equipment.
31、 一种用户设备, 其特征在于, 包括: 31. A user equipment, characterized by: including:
接收单元, 用于接收源基站发送的切换命令, 所述切换命令具有为所述 用户设备分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上 行传输对应的上行资源配置信息; A receiving unit, configured to receive a switching command sent by the source base station, where the switching command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched allocated to the user equipment;
配置单元, 用于根据所述下行资源配置信息进行下行资源配置, 切换后 所述用户设备保持与所述源基站的所述上行传输且经由目标基站进行所述下 行传输; 或根据所述上行资源配置信息进行上行资源配置, 切换后所述用户 设备保持与所述源基站间的所述下行传输且经由所述目标基站进行所述上行 传输; A configuration unit configured to configure downlink resources according to the downlink resource configuration information, and after the handover, the user equipment maintains the uplink transmission with the source base station and performs the downlink transmission via the target base station; or according to the uplink resources The configuration information configures uplink resources, and after the handover, the user equipment maintains the downlink transmission with the source base station and performs the uplink transmission via the target base station;
其中, 所述下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类 型指示, 或, 所述上行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换 类型指示。 Wherein, the downlink resource configuration information includes a switching class used to indicate downlink transmission switching. Type indication, or, the uplink resource configuration information includes a switching type indication used to indicate uplink transmission switching.
32、 根据权利要求 31所述的用户设备, 其特征在于: 32. The user equipment according to claim 31, characterized in that:
所述切换命令中还包括指示标识; The switching command also includes an indication mark;
所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述 待切换的下行传输的下行链路并保留与所述源基站之间的上行链路; 或 The indication identifier is used to instruct the user equipment and the target base station to create a new downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched and reserve an uplink with the source base station; or
所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述 待切换的上行传输的上行链路并保留与所述源基站之间的下行链路; 或, 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述 待切换的下行传输的下行链路或新建用于承载所述待切换的上行传输的上行 链路, 并保留与所述源基站之间的上行链路和下行链路。 The indication identifier is used to instruct the user equipment and the target base station to create a new uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched and reserve a downlink with the source base station; or, the indication The identifier is used to instruct the user equipment and the target base station to create a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched or to create an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched, and is reserved with the Uplink and downlink between source base stations.
33、 根据权利要求 31或 32所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 还包括划分 单元, 用于: 33. The user equipment according to claim 31 or 32, further comprising a dividing unit for:
将所述 PDCP实体划分为上行 PDCP实体和下行 PDCP实体, 所述上 行 PDCP实体与所述源基站提供的第二小区对应,所述下行 PDCP实体与所 述目标基站提供的第一小区对应; The PDCP entity is divided into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station;
将所述 RLC实体划分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体,所述上行 RLC 实体与所述源基站提供的第二小区对应,所述下行 RLC实体与所述目标基站 提供的第一小区对应; Divide the RLC entity into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station;
其中, 所述用户设备经由所述第一小区与所述目标基站进行所述下行传 输, 并经由所述第二小区与所述源基站进行所述上行传输。 Wherein, the user equipment performs the downlink transmission with the target base station via the first cell, and performs the uplink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
34、 根据权利要求 33 所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述源基站为微 基站, 所述目标基站为宏基站。 34. The user equipment according to claim 33, wherein the source base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station.
35、 根据权利要求 31或 32所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 还包括划分 单元, 用于: 35. The user equipment according to claim 31 or 32, further comprising a dividing unit for:
将所述 PDCP实体划分为上行 PDCP实体和下行 PDCP实体, 所述上 行 PDCP实体与所述目标基站提供的第一小区对应,所述下行 PDCP实体与 所述源基站提供的第二小区对应; Divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station;
将所述 RLC实体划分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体,所述上行 RLC 实体与所述目标基站提供的第一小区对应,所述下行 RLC实体与所述源基站 提供的第二小区对应; The RLC entity is divided into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity. The uplink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the source base station. The second cell correspondence provided;
其中, 所述用户设备经由所述第一小区与所述目标基站进行所述上行传 输, 并经由所述第二小区与所述源基站进行所述下行传输。 Wherein, the user equipment performs the uplink transmission with the target base station via the first cell, and performs the downlink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
36、 根据权利要求 35 所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述源基站为宏 基站, 所述目标基站为微基站。 36. The user equipment according to claim 35, wherein the source base station is a macro base station, and the target base station is a micro base station.
37、 一种基站, 其特征在于, 包括: 37. A base station, characterized by including:
处理器, 用于确定将用户设备的下行传输切换至第一小区或者将用户设 备的上行传输切换至第一小区; A processor, configured to determine to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell or to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell;
发射机, 用于向所述第一小区对应的目标基站发送切换请求, 所述切换 请求具有所述用户设备待切换的下行传输信息或上行传输信息; A transmitter, configured to send a handover request to the target base station corresponding to the first cell, where the handover request contains downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
所述发射机还用于, 向所述用户设备发送切换命令, 所述切换命令具有 为所述用户设备分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切 换的上行传输对应的上行资源配置信息, 以便切换后所述用户设备保持与所 述基站的所述上行传输且经由所述目标基站进行所述下行传输, 或切换后所 述用户设备保持与所述基站间的所述下行传输且经由所述目标基站进行所述 上行传输; The transmitter is further configured to send a switching command to the user equipment, where the switching command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or uplink resources corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched allocated to the user equipment. Configure information so that after the handover, the user equipment maintains the uplink transmission with the base station and performs the downlink transmission via the target base station, or after the handover, the user equipment maintains the downlink transmission with the base station. and perform the uplink transmission via the target base station;
其中, 所述下行传输信息和所述下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下 行传输切换的切换类型指示, 或, 所述上行传输信息和所述上行资源配置信 息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指示。 Wherein, the downlink transmission information and the downlink resource configuration information include a switching type indication for instructing downlink transmission switching, or, the uplink transmission information and the uplink resource configuration information include a switching type indication for instructing uplink transmission switching. Switch type indication.
38、 根据权利要求 37所述的基站, 其特征在于, 所述处理器具体用于: 当所述基站为微基站, 所述目标基站为宏基站时, 确定将所述用户设备的下 行传输切换至由所述宏基站提供服务的所述第一小区; 或, 38. The base station according to claim 37, wherein the processor is specifically configured to: when the base station is a micro base station and the target base station is a macro base station, determine to switch the downlink transmission of the user equipment To the first cell served by the macro base station; or,
当所述基站为宏基站, 所述目标基站为微基站时, 确定将所述用户设备 的上行传输切换至由所述微基站提供服务的所述第一小区。 When the base station is a macro base station and the target base station is a micro base station, it is determined to switch the uplink transmission of the user equipment to the first cell provided by the micro base station.
39、 根据权利要求 37或 38所述的基站, 其特征在于: 39. The base station according to claim 37 or 38, characterized in that:
所述第一小区与切换前向所述用户设备提供服务的所述源基站对应的小 区的覆盖范围有重叠; 或, The coverage of the first cell overlaps with the cell corresponding to the source base station that provided services to the user equipment before handover; or,
所述目标基站与所述源基站的频率有重叠。 The frequencies of the target base station and the source base station overlap.
40、 根据权利要求 37-39任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于: 40. The base station according to any one of claims 37-39, characterized in that:
所述发射机还用于: 向所述目标基站发送无线资源分配请求消息, 所述 分配请求消息用于所述目标基站在所述第一小区中为所述用户设备分配待切 换的下行传输对应的下行资源或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源。 The transmitter is also used to: send a wireless resource allocation request message to the target base station, the The allocation request message is used by the target base station to allocate downlink resources corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or uplink resources corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched to the user equipment in the first cell.
41、 根据权利要求 37-40任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于: 41. The base station according to any one of claims 37-40, characterized in that:
所述发射机还用于: 向所述用户设备发送媒体接入控制层控制单元 MAC CE, 所述 MAC CE用于指示是否允许上行传输和下行传输分离。 The transmitter is also configured to: send a media access control layer control unit MAC CE to the user equipment, where the MAC CE is used to indicate whether to allow separation of uplink transmission and downlink transmission.
42、 根据权利要求 37-41任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于: 42. The base station according to any one of claims 37-41, characterized in that:
所述下行传输信息还包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个演进的无线 接入承载 E-RAB标识、所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参 数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 下行无线资源专用配置信息和 /或所述用户终端的小区-无线网络临时标识 C-RNTI信息; The downlink transmission information also includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identity, E-RAB quality of service parameters corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identity, and radio resource control context information. ; Wherein, the radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource dedicated configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identity C-RNTI information of the user terminal;
所述上行传输信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 E-RAB标识、 所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下 文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 上行无线资源专用配置 信息和 /或所述用户终端的 C-RNTI信息。 The uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, the E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; wherein, the radio resource The control context information includes: uplink radio resource dedicated configuration information and/or C-RNTI information of the user terminal.
43、 根据权利要求 37-42任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于: 43. The base station according to any one of claims 37-42, characterized in that:
所述为所述用户设备分配的下行资源配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组 合: 信令无线承载 SRB下行配置信息、 数据无线承载 DRB下行配置信息、 媒体接入控制 MAC下行配置信息、 物理下行共享信道 PDSCH配置信息; 所述为所述用户设备分配的上行资源配置信息包括以下一种或任意种组 合: SRB上行配置信息、 DRB上行配置信息、 MAC上行配置信息、 PUSCH 配置信息。 The downlink resource configuration information allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: signaling radio bearer SRB downlink configuration information, data radio bearer DRB downlink configuration information, media access control MAC downlink configuration information, physical downlink Shared channel PDSCH configuration information; The uplink resource configuration information allocated to the user equipment includes one or any combination of the following: SRB uplink configuration information, DRB uplink configuration information, MAC uplink configuration information, and PUSCH configuration information.
44、 根据权利要求 37-43任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于: 44. The base station according to any one of claims 37-43, characterized in that:
所述切换命令中还包括指示标识; The switching command also includes an indication mark;
所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载待切 换的下行传输的下行链路并保留与所述基站之间的上行链路; 或 The indication identifier is used to instruct the user equipment and the target base station to create a new downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched and reserve the uplink with the base station; or
所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述 待切换的上行传输的上行链路并保留与所述基站之间的下行链路; 或, The indication identifier is used to instruct the user equipment and the target base station to create a new uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched and reserve a downlink with the base station; or,
所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述 待切换的下行传输的下行链路或新建用于承载所述待切换的上行传输的上行 链路, 并保留与所述基站之间的上行链路和下行链路。 The indication mark is used to instruct the user equipment and the target base station to create a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched or to create an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched. link, and retains the uplink and downlink with the base station.
45、 一种基站, 其特征在于, 包括: 45. A base station, characterized by including:
接收机, 用于接收源基站发送的切换请求消息, 所述切换请求具有用户 设备待切换的下行传输信息或上行传输信息; A receiver, configured to receive a handover request message sent by the source base station, where the handover request contains downlink transmission information or uplink transmission information to be switched by the user equipment;
处理器, 用于确定允许所述用户设备的下行传输或上行传输切换至所述 基站提供的第一小区; A processor, configured to determine to allow the downlink transmission or uplink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the first cell provided by the base station;
发射机, 用于向所述源基站发送为所述用户设备分配的待切换的下行传 输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源配置信 息, 以便切换后所述用户设备保持与所述源基站的所述上行传输且经由所述 基站进行所述下行传输, 或以便切换后所述用户设备保持与所述源基站间的 所述下行传输且经由所述基站进行所述上行传输; A transmitter configured to send to the source base station the downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or the uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched allocated to the user equipment, so that the user equipment maintains the The uplink transmission with the source base station and the downlink transmission via the base station, or so that after the handover, the user equipment maintains the downlink transmission with the source base station and performs the uplink via the base station transmission; transmission
其中 , 所述下行传输信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类型指 示, 或者, 所述上行传输信息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换类型指 示。 Wherein, the downlink transmission information includes a switching type indication for instructing downlink transmission switching, or the uplink transmission information includes a switching type indication for instructing uplink transmission switching.
46、 根据权利要求 45 所述的基站, 其特征在于: 所述处理器, 具体用 于: 46. The base station according to claim 45, characterized in that: the processor is specifically used for:
当所述源基站为微基站, 所述基站为宏基站时, 确定允许所述用户设备 的下行传输切换至所述基站提供的第一小区; 或, When the source base station is a micro base station and the base station is a macro base station, it is determined to allow the downlink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the first cell provided by the base station; or,
当所述源基站为宏基站, 所述基站为微基站时, 确定允许所述用户设备 的上行传输切换至所述基站提供的第一小区。 When the source base station is a macro base station and the base station is a micro base station, it is determined to allow the uplink transmission of the user equipment to be switched to the first cell provided by the base station.
47、 根据权利要求 45或 46所述的基站, 所述接收机还用于: 接收所述源基站发送的无线资源分配请求消息, 所述无线资源分配请求 消息用于所述基站在所述第一小区中为所述用户设备分配待切换的下行传输 对应的下行资源或者待切换的上行传输对应的上行资源。 47. The base station according to claim 45 or 46, the receiver is further configured to: receive a wireless resource allocation request message sent by the source base station, the wireless resource allocation request message being used by the base station for the third base station. In a cell, the user equipment is allocated downlink resources corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or uplink resources corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched.
48、 根据权利要求 45-47任一项所述的基站, 其特征在于: 48. The base station according to any one of claims 45-47, characterized in that:
所述下行传输信息还包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个演进的无线 接入承载 E-RAB标识、所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参 数、 无线资源控制上下文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 下行无线资源专用配置信息和 /或所述用户设备的小区-无线网络临时标识 C-RNTI信息; 所述上行传输信息包括以下一种或任意种组合: 至少一个 E-RAB标识、 所述至少一个 E-RAB标识对应的 E-RAB服务质量参数、 无线资源控制上下 文信息; 其中, 所述无线资源控制上下文信息包括: 上行无线资源专用配置 信息和 /或所述用户设备的 C-RNTI信息。 The downlink transmission information also includes one or any combination of the following: at least one evolved radio access bearer E-RAB identity, E-RAB quality of service parameters corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identity, and radio resource control context information. ; Wherein, the radio resource control context information includes: downlink radio resource dedicated configuration information and/or cell-radio network temporary identity C-RNTI information of the user equipment; The uplink transmission information includes one or any combination of the following: at least one E-RAB identifier, the E-RAB quality of service parameter corresponding to the at least one E-RAB identifier, and radio resource control context information; wherein, the radio resource The control context information includes: uplink radio resource dedicated configuration information and/or C-RNTI information of the user equipment.
49、 一种用户设备, 其特征在于, 包括: 49. A user equipment, characterized by: including:
接收机, 用于接收源基站发送的切换命令, 所述切换命令具有为所述用 户设备分配的待切换的下行传输对应的下行资源配置信息或者待切换的上行 传输对应的上行资源配置信息; A receiver, configured to receive a switching command sent by the source base station, where the switching command has downlink resource configuration information corresponding to the downlink transmission to be switched or uplink resource configuration information corresponding to the uplink transmission to be switched allocated to the user equipment;
处理器, 用于根据所述下行资源配置信息进行下行资源配置, 切换后所 述用户设备保持与所述源基站的所述上行传输且经由目标基站进行所述下行 传输; 或根据所述上行资源配置信息进行上行资源配置, 切换后所述用户设 备保持与所述源基站间的所述下行传输且经由所述目标基站进行所述上行传 输; A processor configured to perform downlink resource configuration according to the downlink resource configuration information, and after the handover, the user equipment maintains the uplink transmission with the source base station and performs the downlink transmission via the target base station; or according to the uplink resources The configuration information configures uplink resources, and after the handover, the user equipment maintains the downlink transmission with the source base station and performs the uplink transmission via the target base station;
其中, 所述下行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行下行传输切换的切换类 型指示, 或, 所述上行资源配置信息包括用于指示进行上行传输切换的切换 类型指示。 Wherein, the downlink resource configuration information includes a switching type indication for instructing downlink transmission switching, or the uplink resource configuration information includes a switching type indication for instructing uplink transmission switching.
50、 根据权利要求 49所述的用户设备, 其特征在于: 50. The user equipment according to claim 49, characterized in that:
所述切换命令中还包括指示标识; The switching command also includes an indication mark;
所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述 待切换的下行传输的下行链路并保留与所述源基站之间的上行链路; 或 The indication identifier is used to instruct the user equipment and the target base station to create a new downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched and reserve an uplink with the source base station; or
所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述 待切换的上行传输的上行链路并保留与所述源基站之间的下行链路; 或, 所述指示标识用于指示所述用户设备与所述目标基站新建用于承载所述 待切换的下行传输的下行链路或新建用于承载所述待切换的上行传输的上行 链路, 并保留与所述源基站之间的上行链路和下行链路。 The indication identifier is used to instruct the user equipment and the target base station to create a new uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched and reserve a downlink with the source base station; or, the indication The identifier is used to instruct the user equipment and the target base station to create a downlink for carrying the downlink transmission to be switched or to create an uplink for carrying the uplink transmission to be switched, and is reserved with the Uplink and downlink between source base stations.
51、 根据权利要求 49或 50所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器 还用于: 51. The user equipment according to claim 49 or 50, characterized in that the processor is also used to:
将所述 PDCP实体划分为上行 PDCP实体和下行 PDCP实体, 所述上 行 PDCP实体与所述源基站提供的第二小区对应,所述下行 PDCP实体与所 述目标基站提供的第一小区对应; 将所述 RLC实体划分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体,所述上行 RLC 实体与所述源基站提供的第二小区对应,所述下行 RLC实体与所述目标基站 提供的第一小区对应; Divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, where the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station; Divide the RLC entity into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station;
其中, 所述用户设备经由所述第一小区与所述目标基站进行所述下行传 输, 并经由所述第二小区与所述源基站进行所述上行传输。 Wherein, the user equipment performs the downlink transmission with the target base station via the first cell, and performs the uplink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
52、 根据权利要求 51 所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述源基站为微 基站, 所述目标基站为宏基站。 52. The user equipment according to claim 51, wherein the source base station is a micro base station, and the target base station is a macro base station.
53、 根据权利要求 49或 50所述的用户设备, 其特征在于: 53. The user equipment according to claim 49 or 50, characterized in that:
所述处理器还用于: 将所述 PDCP 实体划分为上行 PDCP 实体和下行 PDCP实体, 所述上行 PDCP实体与所述目标基站提供的第一小区对应, 所 述下行 PDCP实体与所述源基站提供的第二小区对应; The processor is further configured to: divide the PDCP entity into an uplink PDCP entity and a downlink PDCP entity, the uplink PDCP entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink PDCP entity corresponds to the source base station The second cell correspondence provided;
将所述 RLC实体划分为上行 RLC实体和下行 RLC实体,所述上行 RLC 实体与所述目标基站提供的第一小区对应,所述下行 RLC实体与所述源基站 提供的第二小区对应; Divide the RLC entity into an uplink RLC entity and a downlink RLC entity, the uplink RLC entity corresponds to the first cell provided by the target base station, and the downlink RLC entity corresponds to the second cell provided by the source base station;
其中, 所述用户设备经由所述第一小区与所述目标基站进行所述上行传 输, 并经由所述第二小区与所述源基站进行所述下行传输。 Wherein, the user equipment performs the uplink transmission with the target base station via the first cell, and performs the downlink transmission with the source base station via the second cell.
54、 根据权利要求 53 所述的用户设备, 其特征在于, 所述源基站为宏 基站, 所述目标基站为微基站。 54. The user equipment according to claim 53, wherein the source base station is a macro base station, and the target base station is a micro base station.
PCT/CN2012/083208 2012-10-19 2012-10-19 Switching method and device WO2014059663A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201280036231.7A CN104255056B (en) 2012-10-19 2012-10-19 Switching method and equipment
PCT/CN2012/083208 WO2014059663A1 (en) 2012-10-19 2012-10-19 Switching method and device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2012/083208 WO2014059663A1 (en) 2012-10-19 2012-10-19 Switching method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2014059663A1 true WO2014059663A1 (en) 2014-04-24

Family

ID=50487476

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2012/083208 WO2014059663A1 (en) 2012-10-19 2012-10-19 Switching method and device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN104255056B (en)
WO (1) WO2014059663A1 (en)

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106341848A (en) * 2015-07-07 2017-01-18 电信科学技术研究院 Switching method and device
CN106941720A (en) * 2016-01-04 2017-07-11 中国移动通信集团公司 A kind of information processing method and small base station system
EP3197233A4 (en) * 2014-08-01 2017-08-02 China Academy of Telecommunications Technology Wireless network access control method, device and system
CN107454638A (en) * 2017-08-02 2017-12-08 杭州迪普科技股份有限公司 The sending method and device of message, computer-readable recording medium
EP3493597A4 (en) * 2016-09-07 2019-06-05 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Switching method and apparatus
EP3550887A1 (en) * 2015-05-27 2019-10-09 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. User equipment handover method, and device
CN110446231A (en) * 2018-05-03 2019-11-12 华为技术有限公司 A kind of communication means and equipment of wireless network
WO2020103152A1 (en) * 2018-11-23 2020-05-28 Nokia Shanghai Bell Co., Ltd. Link switch in joint network deployments
CN111212459A (en) * 2018-11-22 2020-05-29 华为技术有限公司 Relay communication method and device
WO2021016928A1 (en) * 2019-07-31 2021-02-04 Zte Corporation Discontinuous reception (drx) configuration for automatic neighbor relation (anr)

Families Citing this family (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018068204A1 (en) * 2016-10-11 2018-04-19 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Data transmission during handover
CA3061416A1 (en) * 2017-05-05 2018-11-08 Sony Corporation Communications device, infrastructure equipment, wireless communications network and methods
CN112399489A (en) * 2019-08-14 2021-02-23 夏普株式会社 Cell switching method and user equipment
EP4075880A4 (en) * 2019-12-31 2022-12-28 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Context management method and apparatus

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN1252659A (en) * 1998-10-23 2000-05-10 王生安 Asymmetric transmission channel separating radio access system
CN101374324A (en) * 2007-08-23 2009-02-25 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Method, system and node equipment for implementing district switch by mobile terminal
CN101883406A (en) * 2009-05-07 2010-11-10 株式会社Ntt都科摩 Switching method, mobile terminal and base station

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN1252659A (en) * 1998-10-23 2000-05-10 王生安 Asymmetric transmission channel separating radio access system
CN101374324A (en) * 2007-08-23 2009-02-25 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Method, system and node equipment for implementing district switch by mobile terminal
CN101883406A (en) * 2009-05-07 2010-11-10 株式会社Ntt都科摩 Switching method, mobile terminal and base station

Cited By (19)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10555254B2 (en) 2014-08-01 2020-02-04 China Academy Of Telecommunications Technology Wireless network access control method, device and system
EP3197233A4 (en) * 2014-08-01 2017-08-02 China Academy of Telecommunications Technology Wireless network access control method, device and system
US11503520B2 (en) 2015-05-27 2022-11-15 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. User equipment handover method and device
EP3550887A1 (en) * 2015-05-27 2019-10-09 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. User equipment handover method, and device
US10791484B2 (en) 2015-05-27 2020-09-29 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. User equipment handover method and device
CN106341848A (en) * 2015-07-07 2017-01-18 电信科学技术研究院 Switching method and device
CN106941720A (en) * 2016-01-04 2017-07-11 中国移动通信集团公司 A kind of information processing method and small base station system
US10932162B2 (en) 2016-09-07 2021-02-23 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Handover method and apparatus
EP3493597A4 (en) * 2016-09-07 2019-06-05 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Switching method and apparatus
CN107454638A (en) * 2017-08-02 2017-12-08 杭州迪普科技股份有限公司 The sending method and device of message, computer-readable recording medium
CN110446231A (en) * 2018-05-03 2019-11-12 华为技术有限公司 A kind of communication means and equipment of wireless network
CN110446231B (en) * 2018-05-03 2021-07-16 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device of wireless network
CN111212459A (en) * 2018-11-22 2020-05-29 华为技术有限公司 Relay communication method and device
CN111212459B (en) * 2018-11-22 2021-09-14 华为技术有限公司 Relay communication method and device
US11968633B2 (en) 2018-11-22 2024-04-23 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Relay communication method and apparatus
WO2020103152A1 (en) * 2018-11-23 2020-05-28 Nokia Shanghai Bell Co., Ltd. Link switch in joint network deployments
CN113170361A (en) * 2018-11-23 2021-07-23 上海诺基亚贝尔股份有限公司 Link switching in federated network deployments
CN113170361B (en) * 2018-11-23 2023-01-31 上海诺基亚贝尔股份有限公司 Link switching in federated network deployments
WO2021016928A1 (en) * 2019-07-31 2021-02-04 Zte Corporation Discontinuous reception (drx) configuration for automatic neighbor relation (anr)

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN104255056A (en) 2014-12-31
CN104255056B (en) 2018-11-20

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11076334B2 (en) Data forwarding method, device, and communications system
US11134532B2 (en) Radio communication system, base station apparatus, and radio terminal
US11356924B2 (en) Radio communication system, base station, mobile station, communication control method, and computer readable medium
WO2014059663A1 (en) Switching method and device
US20190028151A1 (en) Data transmission method, base station, and user equipment
US9681352B2 (en) Bearer configuration signaling
CN110062430B (en) Method for connecting a wireless terminal to a plurality of cells in a communication network
JP2021153323A (en) Method and device for indicating type of bearer used for next message in wireless communication system
US20150043492A1 (en) Method for providing dual connectivity in wireless communication system
US20150124748A1 (en) Method and apparatus for performing dual-connectivity operation in heterogeneous network
EP3567975B1 (en) Methods of operating network nodes in a communication network, and network nodes implementing the same
WO2014048256A1 (en) Local bearer management method and device
US11395205B2 (en) Method and apparatus for performing DC based handover
WO2014012410A1 (en) Method and device for data transmission and communication system
JP2016529770A (en) Method and apparatus for communicating data to a small cell in a wireless communication system
CN108184249B (en) Information transmission method and system of backhaul link, proxy equipment and access equipment
JP2019106721A (en) Communication method, processor, and user device
WO2017166293A1 (en) Mobility management method, device and system
WO2014048361A1 (en) Resource configuration method and device
US10314086B2 (en) Radio bearer setup method and device
WO2015135125A1 (en) Wireless connection establishment method and apparatus
RU2671845C1 (en) Data transmission method, base station and user equipment
WO2024057283A1 (en) Key for connectivity to a cell group
WO2024075096A1 (en) Timing alignment acquisition
KR20140080278A (en) Method and apparatus of controling bearer extension in heterogeneous network wireless communication system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 12886644

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 12886644

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1